Home

065-7861POE Series User`s Manual

1. Pon imk Speed Flow Control Maximum Excessive Power Current Configured Current Rx Current Tx Configured Frame Size Collision Mode Control A gt E a 9600 lt gt ETE x 1 1Gtax Auto E E x 9600 Discard Disabled x 2 Down Auto il x Be O 9600 Discard Disabled 3 Down Auto vi SE se O 9600 Discard Disabled 4 Down Auto Ka ES x a 9600 Discard Disabled 5 Down Auto x x a 9600 Discard Disabled 6 Down Auto Ka ES x O 9600 Discard Disabled 7 Down Auto x lt x 9600 Discard Disabled 8 Down Auto Ba ES O 9600 Discard Disabled x 9 Down Auto E x x a 9600 Discard Disabled iv 10 Down Auto a x O 9600 Discard Disabled 1 0 Down Auto FA F2 a 9600 Discard Disabled 12 Dom Auto Sa x O 9600 Discard 4 Disabled x 13 Down Auto aS x a 9600 Discard Disabled 14 Dom Auto E x x O 9600 Discard Disabled E 15 Down Auto s x a 9600 Discard Disabled x 16 Down Auto K x x O 9600 Discard Disabled 17 Down Auto x E x a 9600 Discard Disabled 18 Down Auto we x D 9600 Discard Disabled 19 Down Auto w x x a 9600 Discard Disabled 20
2. Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description e Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled e Port Mode Configuration Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port e Max Dynamic Clients Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port This value can be 0 1 2 or unlimited If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal to 0 it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 209 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 1 2 Static Table The section describes to configure the Static IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch You could use the Static IP Source Guard Table configure to manage the entries Web Interface To configure a Static IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Add new entry 2 Specify the Port VLAN ID IP Address and MAC address in the entry 3 Click Save Figure 4 1 2 Th
3. 1 2 3 4 S 6 7 8 9 10 11 Save J Reset Parameter description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row eo Rate The allowed values are 0 3276700 in pps or 0 100 200 300 1000000 in kbps e Unit Specify the rate unit The allowed values are pps packets per second kbps Kbits per second e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved 53 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 values 54 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 2 3 Access Control List The section describes how to configure Access Control List rule An Access Control List ACL is a sequential list of permit or denies conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match the frame is accepted Other actions can also be invoked when a matching packet is found including rate limiting copying matching packets to another port or to the system log or shutting down a port This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined Th
4. Save Cane 55 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type Ethernet ype The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Port Copy Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Indicates the lo
5. Port Members Delete VLANID MAC Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Add new static entry Save Delete VLANID MAC Address i 00 00 00 00 00 00 sae 130 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description Aging Configuration By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Configure aging time by entering a value here in seconds for example Age time seconds The allowed range is 10 to 1000000 seconds Disable the automatic aging of dynamic entries by checking 12 Disable automatic aging MAC Table Learning If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Each port can do learning based upon the following settings Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received Disable No learning is done Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Gi Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface Static MAC Table Configuration
6. IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 Type Indicates the Type It can be either Allow or Deny 104 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 7 MVR The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLAN In a multicast television application a PC or a television with a set top box can receive the multicast stream Multiple set top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port which is a switch port configured as an MVR receiver port When a subscriber selects a channel the set top box or PC sends an IGMP join message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast Uplink ports that send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports 3 7 1 Configuration The section describes user could set the MVR basic Configuration and some parameters in the switch Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping Port Group Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Configuration 2 Scroll the MVR mode to enable or disable and Scroll to set all parameters 3 Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 7 1 The MVR Configuration nee Mode Type Immediate Leave 1 Disabled Receiver Disabled Disabled ll Receiver Disabled 3 ET Di
7. 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping IPv4 SSM Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the IGMPv3 IPv4 SSM Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 6 6 The IGMPv3 IPv4 SSM Information IGMPv3 Information Autoxefresh DO Start from VLAN 1 and Group 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page VLANID Group PortNo Mode Source Address Type No more entries Parameter description Navigating the IGMPv3 Information Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMPv3 SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMPv3 Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMPv3 Information Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next IGMPv3 Information Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the
8. 3 18 2 Status This page displays the loop protection port status the ports of the switch Web Interface To configure the Loop Protection parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Loop Protection Status 2 Evoke the Auto refresh or click to refresh the Loop protection Port status by Manual Figure 3 18 2 The Loop Protection Status a f i I i tge rvaneensg 0 Up 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down 0 Down j i Ri AY Bi ei RE LE L Ba o Uap y y dd se NU Parameter description Port The switch port number of the logical port Action The currently configured port action Transmit The currently configured port transmit mode Loops The number of loops detected on this port Status The current loop protection status of the port Loop Whether a loop is currently detected on the port 196 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 e Time of Last Loop The time of the last loop event detected e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Loop Protection information by manual 197 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 19 Single IP 065 7861POE provide single IP address management
9. DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any SMAC Source MAC address 24 MS bits OUI or Any DMAC Type Destination MAC type possible values are unicast UC multicast MC broadcast BC or Any Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values Any Ethernet LLC SNAP IPv4 IPv6 OR NOTE All frame types are explained below 1 Any Allow all types of frames 2 Ethernet Ethernet Type Valid ethernet type can have value within 0x600 OxFFFF or Any default value is Any 3 LLC SSAP Address Valid SSAP Source Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any DSAP Address Valid DSAP Destination Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OXFF or Any the default value is Any Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any 4 SNAP PID Valid PID a k a ethernet type can have value within 0x00 OxFFFF or Any default value is Any 5 IPv4 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP Specific Source IP address in value mask format or Any IP and Mask are in the format x y z w where x y Z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 When Mask is converted to a 32 bit binary string and read from left to right all bits following the first zero must also be zero DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value r
10. The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry MAC Address The MAC address of the entry Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry Adding a New Static Entry Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table Specify the VLAN ID MAC address and port members for the new entry Click Save Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 131 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 10 2 Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address Web Interface To Display MAC Address Table in the web interface 1 Click Dynamic MAC Table 2 Specify the VLAN and MAC Address 3 Display MAC Address Table Figure 3 10 2 The Dynamic MAC Address Table information 00 00 00 00 00 00 with 20 Port Members 004007818082 v 00 40 C7 82 00 04 y 004007876602 y 00 40 C7 EF 01 18 vy 00 COB7 73 B4 71 v 33330000000 Y vvvvVv vv Vv VV VV VV vv vo VW 333300000002 vv VV VV VV vv VV 33 33FF 82000M y Vv VV VV VV VV VV VV
11. UserName string is restricted to 1 32 e Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask e Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask 28 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 6 3 Users The function is used to configure SNMPv3 user The Entry index key is UserName To create a new UserName account please check lt Add new user gt button and enter the user information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 10 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Users in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Users 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Save Figure 2 6 3 The SNMP Users Configuration User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Din fau Level Protocol Password Protocol Password O default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None None None i Add new user Save MR RU Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Level Protocol Password Protocol Password Auth Priv ve MDs nes w Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Level Indicates the security model that th
12. any vw NoAuth NoPriv NoAuth NoPriy None x Add new access Save Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are any Any security model accepted v1 v2c usm vi Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Level 35 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy e Read View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially set new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 36 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 6 7 Tarp The function is used to configure SNMP trap T
13. most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once successfully authenticated o Multi 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Multi 802 1X variant Multi 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X Multi 802 1X is like Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authentic
14. o _ _ _ q e oa o _ N co wo O 2 E 2 7 F F F F 2 F EEE ee EN ENE ENEE EEN EN ENE ENE EN EN EN EN E 194 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description General Settings e Enable Loop Protection Controls whether loop protections is enabled as a whole e Transmission Time The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port valid values are 1 to 10 seconds e Shutdown Time The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is detected and the port action shuts down the port Valid values are O to 604800 seconds 7 days A value of zero will keep a port disabled until next device restart Port Configuration eo Port The switch port number of the port e Enable Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port e Action Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port Valid values are Shutdown Port Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only e TX Mode Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU s or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU s o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 195 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3
15. M 1 0 BE M 0 0 BE w 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 du 0 BE 0 BE v 0 BE 0 BE 0 BE M 0 BE M 0 BE M lt lt lt L 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 Sae Fesat Parameter description e QoS Class Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7 QoS Class 0 7 can be mapped to followed parameters ODPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 can be configured for all available QoS Classes DSCP Select DSCP value 0 63 from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 179 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 15 10 QoS Control List Configuration The section shows the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row describes a QCE that is defined The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list Web Interface To configure the QoS Control List parameters in the web interface 1 Click be Mic nse QoS QoS Contol List 2 Click the 2 to add a new QoS Control List 3 Scroll all parameters and evoke the Port Member to join the QCE rules 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 15 10 The QoS Control List Configuration QCE P
16. NOTE This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch Uploading software will update all managed switches to the location of a software image and click After the software image is uploaded a page announces that the firmware update is initiated After about a minute the firmware is updated and all managed switches restart the switch restarts WARNING While the firmware is being updated Web access appears to be defunct The front LED flashes Green Off with a frequency of 10 Hz while the firmware update is in progress Do not restart or power off the device at this time or the switch may fail to function afterwards 258 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 5 2 2 Firmware Selection Due to the switch supports Dual image for firmware redundancy purpose You can select what firmware image for your device start firmware or operating firmware This page provides information about the active and alternate backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the alternate image Web Interface To configure a Firmware Selection in the web interface 1 Chick Activate Alternate Image 2 Click yes to complete firmware selection Figure 5 2 2 The Firmware Selection Active Image managed GEL2 ESW26K standalone v1 14 2011 12 20T10 49 42 08 00 Alternate Image managed bk GEPoESM ESW26K standalone dev build by jack server205 2011 12 09T 14 26 08 08 00 2011 12 09T14 26 08 08 00
17. S333 FEAR Y VV VV VV VV VV vv vv RRFRFRFRFEFE Y VV VV VV VV vv VV Vv Vv vv Parameter description MAC Table Columns e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or a dynamic entry e VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the MAC address entries by manual or press clear to clean up the MAC table Others press lt lt or gt gt to upper or down page of the table NOTE Gi 00 40 C7 73 01 29 your switch MAC address for IPv4 33 33 00 00 00 01 Destination MAC for IPv6 Router Advertisement reference IPv6 RA JPG 132 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 33 33 00 00 00 02 Destination MAC for IPv6 Router Solicitation reference IPv6 RS JPG 33 33 FF 73 01 29 Destination MAC for IPv6 Neighbor Solicitation reference IPv6 DAD JPG 33 33 FF A8 01 01 your switch MAC address for IPv6 global IP FF FF FF FF FF FF for Broadcast 133 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 11 VLAN To assign a specific VLAN for management purpose The management VLAN is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a workstation connected to a port in the VLAN This connection supports a VSM SNMP and Telnet session By d
18. Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 167 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 15 4 Port Shaping This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shaping for all switch ports Others the user could get all detail information ot the ports belong to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Shapers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Shapers 2 Display the QoS Egress Port Shapers Figure 3 15 4 The QoS Egress Port Shapers Click the Port index to set the QoS Egress Port Shapers oT 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 az la 18 39 Je 20 21 zi 23 24 25 26 Ye Py 500 kbps 168 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 If you select the schedule
19. The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services e User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services e Abbr A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table 248 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Port Status The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns which are Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter see Abbr has enabled port security State Shows the current state of the port lt can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the li
20. To set the mail sender name e Return Path To set the mail return path as sender mail address e Email Address 1 6 Email address that would like to receive the alarm message e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 205 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 24 UPnP UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components Web Interface To configure the UPnP Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration UPnP 2 Scroll to select the mode to enable or disable 3 Specify the parameters in each blank field 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 24 1 The UPnP Configuration UPnP Configuration Mode Disabled TTL 4 Advertising Duration 100 Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the UPnP Configuration page e Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are Enabled Enable UPnP mode operation Disabled Disable UPnP mode operation When the mode is enabled two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets t
21. e Egress Port Egress Rewriting can be one of below parameters e Disable No Egress rewrite e Enable Rewrite enable without remapped e Remap DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 174 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 15 7 DSCP Based QoS The section will teach user to configure the DSCP Based QoS mode that This page allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches Web Interface To configure the DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Based QoS 2 Evoke to enable or disable the DSCP for Trust 3 Scroll to select QoS Class and DPL parameters 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 15 7 The DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification Configuration 175 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description e DSCP Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 64 e Trust Click to check if the DSCP value is trusted e QoS Class QoS Class value can be any of 0 7 e DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 3 e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes m
22. e The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading O s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 e Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below 230 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The inte
23. time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 3 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad You can configure the following properties of the issued ICMP packets 267 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 5 5 3 VeriPHY This section is used for running the VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that VeriPHY is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running VeriPHY Therefore running VeriPHY on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete Web Interface To configure a VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify Port which want to check 2 Click Start Figure 5 5 3 The VeriPHY Port PairA LengthA PairB LengthB PairC LengthC PairD LengthD Nidos min amp amp N _ ZE DE KES E REG IEA NE AO EL UDS ASE SF DEA E I Vn EE EEY EU RO DA CS 4 13 E EA Vt A A le CU EL DO GR TP ell ET EAN Pea LA EAN FA EN FA EA REA IN A AS A Aa GAS el AP ME LEE 100 E BE ST TE PTE UD
24. 24 25 26 Save E 154 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure GARP settings There are 2 types configuration settings which can be configured on per port bases Timer Values Applicantion Attribute Type GARP Applicant e Timer Values To set the GARP join timer leave timer and leave all timers units is Micro second Three different timers can be configured on this page Join Timer The default value for Join timer is 200ms Leave Timer The range of values for Leave Time is 600 1000ms The default value for Leave Timer is 600ms Leave All Timer The default value for Leave All Timer is 10000ms e Application Currently only supported application is GVRP e Attribute Type Currently only supported Attribute Type is VLAN e GARP Applicant This configuration is used to configure the Applicant state machine behavior for GARP ona particular port locally e normal participant In this mode the Applicant state machine will operate normally in GARP protocol exchanges e non participant In this mode the Applicant state machine will not participate in the protocol operation The default configuration is normal participant e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 155 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 13 2 Statistics T
25. 6 if 8 y 10 u 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 23 24 25 26 Parameter description eo Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row eo Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port eo Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port e Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port o Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion eo Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear 42 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 You can click them for refresh the Port Statistics information by manual Others click Clear to clean up all Port Statistics 43 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 1 4 Detailed Statistics Rx Q0 7637 Tx Q0 0 Rx Q1 0 TxQ1 0 Rx Q2 0 TxQ2 0 Rx Q3 0 TxQ3 0 Rx Q4 0 TxQ4 0 Rx 05 0 TxQ5 0 Rx Q6 0 Tx Q6 0 Rx Q7 0 TxQ7 10688 Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Port Statistics information automatically e Upper left scroll bar The section describes how to provide detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The displayed counters are the totals for receive and tran
26. 8 queues per port 9600 6 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description e Model name The model name of this device e System description As it is this tells what this device is Here it is 20 port 10 100 1000 Base T 4 Port TP 100 1G SFP Combo 2 100 1G SFP L2 Plus Managed Switch e Location Basically it is the location where this switch is put User defined e Contact For easily managing and maintaining device you may write down the contact person and phone here for getting help soon You can configure this parameter through the device s user interface or SNMP o Device name The name of the switch User defined e System Date Show the system time of the switch Its format day of week month day hours minutes seconds year e System up time The time accumulated since this switch is powered up lts format is day hour minute second e BIOS version The version of the BIOS in this switch e Firmware version The firmware version in this switch e Hardware Mechanical version The version of Hardware and Mechanical The figure before the hyphen is the version of electronic hardware the one after the hyphen is the version of mechanical e Serial number The serial number is assigned by the Signamax e Host IP address The IP address of the switch e Host MAC address It is the Ethernet MAC address of the management agent in this switch e Device Port Show all typ
27. Activate Alternate Image Message from wel page Y Are you si e you want to activate the alternate software image Parameter description e Activate Alternate Image Click to use the alternate image This button may be disabled depending on system state e Cancel Cancel activating the backup image Navigates away from this page e Image The flash index name of the firmware ima e The name of primary preferred image is image the alternate image is named image bk e Version The version of the firmware image eo Date The date where the firmware was produced 259 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 O NOTE 1 Incase the active firmware image is the alternate image only the Active Image table is shown In this case the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled 2 If the alternate image is active due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this 3 The firmware version and date information may be empty for older firmware releases This does not constitute an error 260 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 5 3 Save Restore This section describes how to save and restore the Switch configuration including reset to Factory Defaults Save Start Save Users Restore Users for any maintenance needs 5 3 1 Factory Defaults This section describes how
28. CES eee RSE IBGE LEA EE SOI RS EPS ET Re IPAS SU MOISE ASE AT PA E EE HONOR ES PUR aD E ET STE ES oP he cee ME EE AA EL ED N ES tga Bale Na paca ETS EP PES EPA as 1 Al KA A a RER EA Parameter description e Port The port where you are requesting VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair 268 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 269 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 ACE ACL AES APS A Glossary of Web based Management ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that
29. Configuratio 00 40 c7 74 00 d1 Configuration Revision 0 MSTI Mapping Parameter description Configuration Identification e Configuration Name The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters e Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 72 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 MSTI Mapping eo MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped e VLANs Mapped The list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty I e not having any VLANs o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 73 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 4 3 MSTI Priorities When you implement a Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active For controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance numbe
30. Entries in the MLDv2 Information Table are shown on this page The MLDv2 Information Table is sorted first by VLAN ID then by group and then by Port No Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry Each page shows up to 64 entries from the MLDv2 SSM Source Specific Multicast Information table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLDv2 Information Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLDv2 Information Table Web Interface To display the MLDv2 IPv6 SSM Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping IPv6 SSM Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the MLDv2 IPv6 SSM Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 6 6 The IPv6 SSM Information EE fic VLANID Group PortNo Mode Source Address Type No more entres Parameter description MLDv2 Information Table Columns VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Group Group address of the group displayed Port Switch port number Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude Source Address
31. Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Transmit Error Counters Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the Port Detail Statistics or clear them by manual 45 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 1 5 Qos Statistics The section describes that switch could display the QoS detailed Queuing counters for a specific switch port for the different queues for all switch ports Web Interface To Display the Queuing Counters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then QoS Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 3 1 5 The Queuing Counters Overview Q 8 8 a 8 8 2 E ES ES ES E Qao Rx 13929 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 G3 PSR BSS IS IS PBS bes ES RE IE IRIS IR 213 ro 100 iio ten i too no 1 3 25050000000000000000000000
32. Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not 271 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DHCP Relay DHCP Relay is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assignment policies Specifically the option works
33. Hybrid 5 ES 1 TLL ES ES ESN ES Q0GQGOQO0OQOGQCQOQG0QOTGO OC OOG iii 2 lll Wael 2 ES Parameter description e Ethertype for Custom S ports This field specifies the ether type used for Custom S ports This is a global setting for all 136 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 the Custom S ports Custom Ethertype enables the user to change the Ethertype value on a port to any value to support network devices that do not use the standard 0x8100 Ethertype field value on 802 1Q tagged or 802 1p tagged frames Port This is the logical port number of this row e Port Type Port can be one of the following types Unaware Customer port C port Service port S port Custom Service port S custom port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed e Ingress Filtering Enable ingress filtering on a port by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark e Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged untagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All Oo Port VLAN Mode Configures the
34. MAC and VLAN parameters etc Here we will just go over the standard and extended access lists for TCP IP As you create ACEs for ingress classification you can assign a policy for each port the policy number is 1 8 however each policy can be applied to any port This makes it very easy to determine what type of ACL policy you will be working with 3 2 1 Ports The section describes how to configure the ACL parameters ACE of the each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE Web Interface To configure the ACL Ports Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Ports 2 To scroll the specific parameter value to select the correct value for port ACL setting 3 Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values 5 After you configure complete then you could see the Counter of the port then you could click refresh to update the counter or Clear the information Figure 3 2 1 The ACL Ports Configuration Retesh Clear Port PolicyID Action Rate Limiter ID 1 1 MIMN Permit Disabled M 2 1 w Permit Disabled Y 3 1 MN Permit Disabled w 4 1 MAN Permit M Disabled Y 5 1 407 Permit M Disabled M 6 1 MAN Permit Disabled Y 7 1 m Permit Disable
35. Name The field describe the Trap Event definition eo Severity Level To scroll to select the event type with Emerg Alert Crit Error Warming Notice Info and Debug e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 204 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 23 SMTP Configuration The function is used to set an Alarm trap when the switch alarm then you could set the SMTP server to send you the alarm mail Web Interface To configure the SMTP Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration SMTP Configuration 2 Scroll to select the Severity Level 3 Specify the parameters in each blank field 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 23 1 The SMTP Configuration SMTP Configuration Mail Server User Name o Password Serveriry Level Info B Sender Return Path Email Address 1 Email Address 2 Email Address 3 Email Address 4 Email Address 5 Email Address 6 Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the SMTP Configuration page e Mail Server Specify the IP Address of the server transferring your email eo Username Specify the username on the mail server e Password Specify the password on the mail server e Sender
36. Port Statistics overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP Port Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Statistics Figure 3 3 2 4 The LACP Statistics LI Retesh JL clear et se En 8 Ds a a E eee Ea al 4 EH m1 E m1 EJ a ma a 2 Ea Parameter description eo Port The switch port number LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port e LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port e Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the LACP port statistics information or clear by manual 68 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 4 Spanning Tree The Spanning Tree Protocol STP can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STP compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatic
37. Port index to set the QoS Egress Port Schedulers 165 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 If you select the scheduler mode with wighted then the screen will change as the figure kbps 500 kbps F500 kbps Y a 500 kbps Y 500 kbps 500 kbps Y 500 kbps 500 kbps v save J Reset canca Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port Weight Qn Shows the weight for this queue and port Scheduler Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth Queue Scheduler Weight Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 166 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 100 This parameter is only shown if
38. QG unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may A overall performance for the segment attached to the hu Step3 As each connection is made the Link LED on the switch corresponding to each port will light green 1000 Mbps or amber 100 Mbps to indicate that the connection is valid NETWORK WIRING CONNECTIONS Today the punch down block is an integral part of many of the newer equipment racks It is actually part of the patch panel Instructions for making connections in the wiring closet with this type of equipment follows Step1 Attach one end of a patch cable to an available port on the switch and the other end to the patch panel Step2 If not already in place attach one end of a cable segment to the back of the patch panel where the punch down block is located and the other end to a modular wall outlet Step3 Label the cables to simplify future troubleshooting See Cable Labeling and Connection Records on page 29 Figure 17 Network Wiring Connections Equipment Rack Switch F side view No e Patch Down Block Patch Panel 5 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 System Configuration This chapter describes the entire basic configuration tasks which includes the System Information and any man
39. RON 184 315 12 SON Co ibas 186 3 16 1THERMAL PROTECTION coi A a A a chides 187 3216 1 Configuration id 187 De Os ALU EREIN cst sche ls ant ee meth es eas el ANR A ne Od tte 189 317 S FLOW AGENT 0 A A daca Sade hE Ao dE IZ 190 317 Ad O70 21 61 8 apse EE Rm RES POS OSE ASIP A N EEE ON A est ne 190 B21 722 SAMPIC ls totes these ONO 192 3 18 LOOP RROTEGTION E das 194 82181 CONMQUIATON is 194 3510 2 SATIS oo asda hah NM ii e nt nn Alu El 196 EPak SINGLE Pita il tidad 198 9 19 1 CONTQUIATION toral dan Ec OA cz O N A io aaah AA hie tetas 198 EENE li AAN 199 3 20 EASY PORT EM O A E UT A I ee Re A ne nent 200 35241 MIRRORING EEE RS dirt da dd cid Pida E Au tien ate 202 3 22 TRAP EVENT SEVERITY ita ie dd li 204 3 23 SMTP CGONFIGURATION e e a lo dl nadaa oe ta ci 205 32 UPN Pi a A a E AES es ee bai 206 CHAPTER 4 SECURITY aaamooo ideada sio 208 4 1 IP SOURCE GUARDA eee 208 4 1 1 CONQUE Ni A A A A A eee ats 208 E E e eE o ESEE E E EE E e E 210 421 3 Dynamic Table sisi roeien A AAA 211 422 IARP INSPECTION 52h me un At Ni ps ms nn ne 212 A2 CONQUE e ld tine din monte ds 212 4 2 2 Static Tables ren A en 215 4 23 Dynamic Table tn en Et 216 4 3 DHGP SNGOPING PR ER LS 217 4 331 CONQUE das 217 49 2 SIATISTICS A as 219 4 44 DACP RELAV a tales ie AS ech eae es 221 4 4 T CONQUISTA IA MARNE NU tan rene 221 42A 2 SIAUISTICS 32 ES AT A IA 223 ASB NAS bres chad re Le mans te ete nes tent de acia At 225 4 5 1 COnfIQUrANON hat entr ne M
40. SNMP Enable SNMP agent will be started up All supported MIB OIDs including RMON MIB can be accessed via SNMP manager If the field SNMP is set Disable SNMP agent will be de activated the related Community Name Trap Host IP Address Trap and all MIB counters will be ignored 2 6 1 System This section describes how to configure SNMP System on the switch This function is used to configure SNMP settings community name trap host and public traps as well as the throttle of SNMP A SNMP manager must pass the authentication by identifying both community names then it can access the MIB information of the target device So both parties must have the same community name Once completing the setting click lt Apply gt button the setting takes effect Web Interface To display the configure SNMP System in the web interface 1 Click SNMP System 2 Evoke SNMP State to enable or disable the SNMP function 3 Specify the Engine ID 4 Click Apply Figure2 6 1 The SNMP System Configuration SNMP System Configuration SNMP State Enable Disable Engine ID 800007e5017f000001 Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the SNMP System Configuration page SNMP State The term SNMP here The term SNMP here is used for the activation or de activation of SNMP Enable Enable SNMP state operation Disable Disable SNMP state operation Default Enable Engine ID SNMPv3 engine ID syntax 0 9 a
41. SSIDs in range and asking the user to select one wikipedia SSH SSH is an acronym for Secure SHell It is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged using a secure channel between two networked devices The encryption used by SSH provides confidentiality and integrity of data over an insecure network The goal of SSH was to replace the earlier rlogin TELNET and rsh protocols which did not provide strong authentication or guarantee confidentiality Wikipedia SSM SSM In SyncE this is an abbreviation for Synchronization Status Message and is containing a QL indication STP Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsolete by RSTP SyncE SyncE Is an abbreviation for Synchronous Ethernet This functionality is used to make a network clock frequency synchronized Not to be confused with real time clock synchronized IEEE 1588 T TACACS TACACS is an acronym for Terminal Acess Controller Access Control System Plus lt is a networking protocol which provides access control for routers network access servers and other networked computing devices via one or more centralized servers TACACS provides separate authentication authorization and accounting services Tag Priority Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 10 frame TCP 280 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 TCP is an acrony
42. Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Protocol Group Mapping information by manual 150 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 12 Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality 3 12 1 Configuration The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic lt is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI Web Interface To configure Voice VLAN in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Voice VLAN Configuration 2 Specify VLAN ID Aging Time Traffic Class 4 Specify Port Mode Security Discovery Protocol in the Port Configuration 5 Click Save Figure 3 12 1 The Voice VLAN Configuration cout il i i Hi ii al J I jo oje m TU ee 151 Public
43. Y My Documents My Computer a My Network File name Places Files of type an Files y Parameter description e Browse Click the Browse button to search the Configuration URL and filename e Upload Click the Upload button then the switch will start to upload the configuration from configuration stored location PC or Server 264 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 265 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 5 5 Diagnostics This section provides a set of basic system diagnosis It let users know that whether the system is health or needs to be fixed The basic system check includes ICMP Ping ICMPv6 and VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics 5 5 1 Ping This section allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues Web Interface To configure an ICMP PING Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify ICMP PING IP Address 2 Specify ICMP PING Size 3 Click Start Figure 5 5 1 The ICMP Ping ICMP Ping IP Address 0 000 Ping Size 64 Parameter description e IP Address To set the IP Address of device what you want to ping it e Ping Size To set the ICMP Packet size to ping the other device o Start Click the Start button then the switch will start to ping the device using ICMP packet size what set on the switch After you press 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon recepti
44. a a a E PJ a E PP CI NR OOOO COO OO CCC CWC IO i Ri J Ja EE EENE LE ca e a ll ea le ei Parameter description eo Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e STP Enabled Controls whether STP is enabled on this switch port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended 75 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favour of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 eo Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above e operEdge state flag Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices No Bridges attached Transition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports having operEdge true than for other ports The value of this flag is based on AdminEdge and AutoEdge fields This flag is displayed as Edge in Monitor gt Spanning Tree gt STP Detailed Bridge Status e AdminEdge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is ini
45. allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last listener query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a node s initial report of interest in a multicast address The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 98 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 6 3 Port Group Filtering The section describes that you could to set the Port Group Filtering in the MLD Snooping function On the Ul that you could add new filtering group and safety policy Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping Port Group Configuration in the web interface Click Configuration MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Click the Add new Filtering Group Specify the Filtering Groups with entries per page Click the save to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values oO 5 D Figure 3 7 3 The MLD Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Delete Port Filtering Groups ras new Fiterng Group Param
46. always send out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are Enabled Enable server mode operation Disabled Disable server mode operation e Server Address 1 and 2 Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server 1 and server 2 For redundancy If the switch provide DNS feature it also can be a host name e Syslog Level Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server Possible modes are Info Send information warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors 23 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 5 2 Log This section describes that display the system log information of the switch Web Interface To display the log configuration in the web interface 1 Click Syslog Log 2 Display the log information Figure2 5 2 The System Log configuration Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically e Level level of the system log entry The following level types are supported Information level of the system log Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels e ID ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Time It will display the log record by device time The time of the system log entry Message It will display the log detail message The message of the system log entry e Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click the
47. ami om 0 ma Low sr OFF PoE 0 om om om 0 ma ps pe La OFF PoE 6 0 opa oma om 0 ma ees Ao OFF PoE 7 0 om om om mA Low SS OFF PoE 8 0 om om om 0 mA Fo a Parameter description e Local Port This is the logical port number for this row PD Class To display the PD Power class that identify with a specified current The classification current describes the amount of power the PD will require during normal operation e Power Requested The Power Requested shows the requested amount of power the PD wants to be reserved e Power Allocated The Power Allocated shows the amount of power the switch has allocated for the PD e Power Used The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using e Current Used The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using eo Priority The Priority shows the port s priority configured by the user e Port Status The Port Status shows the port s status e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the PoE Port information by manual 129 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 10 Filtering Data Base Filtering Data Base Configuration gathers many functions including MAC Table Information Static MAC Learning which cannot be categorized to some function type MAC table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in t
48. are discarded 139 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged UVID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVID determines the packet s behaviour at the egress side Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port configuration the following conflicts can occur Functional Conflicts between features Conflicts due to hardware limitation Direct conflict between user modules Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the VLAN Port Status information by manual 140 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 11 5 Private VLANs In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN 3 11 5 1 Private VLANs Membership The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified here Private VLANs can be added or deleted here Port members of each Private VLAN can be added or removed here Private VLANs are based on the source port mask and there are no connections to VLANs This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets By default all ports are VLA
49. b9 Philips and NEC AG phones Li 00 d0 1e Pingtel phones O 00 e0 75 Polycom phones O 00 e0 bb 3Com phones Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Telephony OUI A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description The description of OUI address Normally it describes which vendor telephony device it belongs to The allowed string length is 0 to 32 e Add New entry Click to add a new entry in Voice VLAN OUI table An empty row is added to the table the Telephony OUI Description o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Gi NOTE All non telephonic MAC addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds For example When Pkts keep to enter the port to add a new OUI entry It can help this OUI match current Pkts then it must be found the packet will be forwared 153 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 13 GARP The Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP provides a generic framework whereby devices in a bridged LAN e g end stations and switches can register and de register attribute values such as VLAN Identifiers with each other In doing so the attributes are propagated to devices in the bridged LAN a
50. belongs to lt allows user to what priority criterion to trigger Port be turned off via thermal protection o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 188 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 16 2 Status The section allows the user to inspect the thermal status information related to thermal protection when user configure the Thermal protection function already Web Interface To display the Thermal Protection Status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Thermal Protection Status Figure 3 16 2 The Thermal Protection status Parameter description e Port Indicates the list of physical Port e Temperature Shows the current chip temperature in degrees Celsius Gi NOTE The temperature means the MAC and PHY chipset s TA temperature not PSU device temperature or environment temperature eo Port Status To display the Port status includes link up or link down e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the port current temperature information by manual 189 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 17 s Flow Agent The sFlow Collector configuration for the switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 1 Collector is supported This page allows for configuring sFlow collector IP type sF
51. by setting two sub options Circuit ID option 1 and Remote ID option2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is vlan_id module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number The Remote ID is 6 bytes in length and the value is equal the DHCP relay agents MAC address DHCP Snooping DNS DoS DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information o
52. changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 215 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 2 3 Dynamic Table The section describes to configure the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address Web Interface To configure a Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Start from port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address and entrie per page 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 2 3 The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table a 00 00 00 00 00 00 Port VLANID MAC Address IP Address No more entres Parameter description e Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLANID VLAN ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted e MAC Address User MAC address of the entry e IP Address User IP address of the entry e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table by manual others for next up page or entry 216 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 3 DHCP Snooping The section describes to configure the DHCP Snooping parameters of the switch The DHCP Snooping can prevent attackers from ad
53. configure restricted role on an interface e Disable Select to Disable GVRP rrole on this port Enable Select to Enable GVRP rrole on this port The default configuration is disable Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the GVRP Global configuration information by manual Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 158 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 14 2 Statistics The section describes to shows the basic GVRP Port statistics for all switch ports The statistics relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display GVRP Port statistics in the web interface 1 Click GVRP statistics 2 Scroll which port you want to display the GVRP Counter information 3 Click Refresh to modify the GVRP statistics information Figure 3 14 2 The GVRP Port Statistics Join Tx i we isi ae Bx xs a eae ei A os 2 a A a a E 2 Parameter description Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can see port counters and statistics Join Tx Count explain Join tx Count here Leave Tx Count explain Leave Tx Count here Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper rig
54. displayed table Use the button to start over IGMPv3 Information Table Columns 92 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Group Group address of the group displayed Port Switch port number Mode Indicates the filtering mode maintained per VLAN ID port number Group Address basis It can be either Include or Exclude Source Address IP Address of the source Currently system limits the total number of IP source addresses for filtering to be 128 Type Indicates the Type lt can be either Allow or Deny Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry 93 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 6 MLD Snooping Curiously enough a network node that acts as a source of IPv6 multicast traffic is only an indirect participant in MLD snooping it just provides multicast traffic and MLD doesn t interact with it Note however that in an application like desktop conferencing a network node may act as both a source and an MLD host but MLD interacts with that node only in its role as an MLD host A source node creates multicast traffic by sending packets to a multicast address In IPv6 addresses with the first eight bits set that is FF as the first two characters of the address are
55. f A F min 5 octet max 32 octet fifth octet 26 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 can t input 00 IF change the Engine ID that will clear all original user 27 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 6 2 Communities The function is used to configure SNMPv3 communities The Community and UserName is unique To create a new community account please check lt Add new community gt button and enter the account information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 4 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Communities in the web interface Click SNMP Communities Click Add new community Specify the SNMP communities parameters Click Save If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset ORWD Figure2 6 2 The SNMPvi v2 Communities Security Configuration Delete Community O public O private Add new community Sav Source Mask 0 0 0 0 Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string o UserName The UserName access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The length of
56. for Precision Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual application QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects 278 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class QL QL In SyncE this is the Quality Level of a given clock source This is received on a port in a SSM indicating the quality of the clock received in the port QoS QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to mana
57. for each RADIUS Authentication Server and a number of columns which are o The RADIUS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Authentication Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to O zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server eo Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS Accounting Server and a number of columns which are o The RADIUS Accounting Server number for which the configuration below applies e Enabled Enable the RADIUS Accounting Server by checking this box e IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS Accounting Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation o Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to O zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server eo Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Accounting Server and the switch TACACS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row for each TACACS Au
58. for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports Aging Period This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in an 802 1X based mode this is not so critical since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry Hold Time This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses Single 802 1X Multi 802 1X MAC Based Auth If a client is de
59. for the groups in the address range Format IP address sub mask Proxy Enabled Enable IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Port It shows the physical Port index of switch Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port Throttling Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 84 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 5 2 VLAN Configuration The section describes the VLAN configuration setting process integrated with IGMP Snooping function For each setting page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from t
60. forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped e Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled e Port Copy 58 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the ACL status information by manual 59 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 3 Aggregation The Aggregation is used to configure the settings of Link Aggrega
61. general if a view entry s view type is excluded there should be another view entry existing with view type as included and it s OID subtree should overstep the excluded view entry 33 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 e OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk eo Save To click the Save icon to save the configuration to ROM 34 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 6 6 Access The function is used to configure SNMPv3 accesses The Entry index key are Group Name Security Model and Security level To create a new access account please check lt Add new access gt button and enter the access information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 14 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Access in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Accesses 2 Click Add new Access 3 Specify the SNMP Access parameters 4 Click Save 5 If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset Figure 2 6 6 The SNMP Accesses Configuration Security Security Delete Group Name Model oi Read View Name Write View Name CO default ro_group any NoAuth NoPriv default_view M None v C2 default rw_group Add new access Save any NoAuth NoPriv default_view M default_view Delete cmne tame Security Model IS Read View Name Write View Name
62. icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry 91 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 5 6 IPv4 SSM information Source Specific Multicast SSM is a datagram delivery model that best supports one to many applications also known as broadcast applications SSM is a core network technology of IP multicast targeted for audio and video broadcast application environments For the SSM delivery mode an IP multicast receiver host must use IGMP Version 3 IGMPv3 to subscribe to channel S G By subscribing to this channel the receiver host is indicating that it wants to receive IP multicast traffic sent by source host S to group G The network will deliver IP multicast packets from source host S to group G to all hosts in the network that have subscribed to the channel S G SSM does not require group address allocation within the network only within each source host Different applications running on the same source host must use different SSM groups Different applications running on different source hosts can arbitrarily reuse SSM group addresses without causing any excess traffic on the network Addresses in the range 232 0 0 0 8 232 0 0 0 to 232 255 255 255 are reserved for SSM by IANA In the switch you can configure SSM for arbitrary IP multicast addresses also Web Interface To display the IGMPv3 IPv4 SSM Information in the web interface
63. identification for the system s hardware type software version and networking application 3 Click Save Figure 3 1 2 The Port Configuration v A A Parameter description eo Port This is the logical port number for this row e Description Description of device ports can not include amp eo Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 41 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 1 3 Traffic Overview The section describes to the Port statistics information and provides overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports Web Interface To Display the Port Statistics Overview in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Traffic Overview 2 If you want to auto refresh then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port statistics or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 3 1 3 The Port Statistics Overview Reres JL cear Packets Bytes Errors Drops Filtered Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received 13727 8796 2725189 4876424 Port 20000000000000000000000600 SS000000000000000000000000 SS000000000000000000000000 1 2 3 4 5
64. identifier An OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE You can determine which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address which forms the first 24 bits of a MAC address PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as User Priority PD is an acronym for Powered Device In a PoE gt system the power is delivered from a PSE power sourcing equipment to a remote device The remote device is called a PD PHY is an abbreviation for Physical Interface Transceiver and is the device that implement the Ethernet physical layer IEEE 802 3 ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target 277 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 PoE POE is an acronym for Power Over Ethernet Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable lt could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN
65. in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page The MVR Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group Web Interface To display the MVR Groups Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Groups Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 To Click the Refresh to refresh a entry of the MVR Groups Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 7 2 The MVR Groups Information Refresh Port Members VLAN ID Groups 4 2 314 5 6 718 9 10 14 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 lt No more entries Parameter description MVR Group Table Columns e VLANID VLAN ID of the group e Groups Group ID of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the MVR Group information by manual others for next up page or entry 107 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 7 3 Statistics The section describes the switch will display the MVR detail Statistics after you had configured MVR on the switch It provides the detail MVR Statistics Information Web Interface To display the MVR Statistics Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MVR Statistics 2
66. interface is the upstream interface The router on the upstream interface should be running IGMP Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Basic Configuration 2 Evoke to select enable or disable which Global configuration 3 Evoke which port wants to become a Router Port or enable disable the Fast Leave function 4 Scroll to set the Throttling parameter 5 Click the save to save the setting 6 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 1 The IGMP Snooping Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled O Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding Enabled 7 IGMP SSM Range 232 0 0 0 Proxy Enabled O Port RouterPort FastLeave Throttling a O O a O a a a a o a O O a O O o m a O o O O O g a o O O o O O a a O O EJ a O O O O a a O O a oO a O O a B D a 2 83 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding enabled Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding IGMP SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model
67. mm 16 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description Port The port number for which the configuration below applies QoS class Controls the default QoS class i e the QoS class for frames not classified in any other way There is a one to one mapping between QoS class queue and priority A QoS class of 0 zero has the lowest priority ODP level Controls the default DP level i e the DP level for frames not classified in any other way eo PCP Controls the default PCP for untagged frames e DEI Controls the default DEI for untagged frames e Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port Disabled Use default QoS class and DP level for tagged frames Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and or mapping DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values O NOTE DP level Every incoming frame is classified to a Drop Precedence Level DP level which is used throughout the device for providing congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific DP level PCP PCP is an acronym for Priority Code Point It is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame DEI DEI is an acro
68. points and other equipment where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to main power supply 3 9 1 Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings and show all PoE Supply W Web Interface To configure Power Over Ethernet in the web interface 1 Click configuration 2 Specify the Reserved Power determined and Power Management ode Specify the PoE or PoE and Priority 3 Click Save Figure 3 9 1 The PoE Configuration PoE Mode Priority Enabled Low Enabled Enabled x Enabled M Enabled M Enabled M Enabled M E3 i 3 13 660166 o yy SEN ES o il IES o Enabled x f Enabled m Low Enabled qn SEES m J w 2 ES 2 m 2 w 8 Ei Ss Z i amp 2 RRK ells 2 SES miimim im MENEE IAE Es 81188 i Parameter description 127 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Power Supply Configuration e Primary Power Supply W The switch can have PoE power supplies It is used as power source For being able to determine the amount of power the PD may use it must be defined what amount of power the power sources can deliver Ethernet Port Configuration Port This is the logical port number for this row e PoE State The PoE Mode repres
69. received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the ACL Port Configuration or clear them by manual 52 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 2 2 Rate Limiters The section describes how to configure the switch s ACL Rate Limiter parameters The Rate Limiter Level from 1 to 16 that allow user to set rate limiter value and units with pps or kbps Web Interface To configure ACL Rate Limiter in the web interface Click Configuration ACL then Rate Limiter To specific the Rate field and the range from 0 to 3276700 To scroll the Unit with pps or kbps Click the save to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values CENAS Figure 3 2 2 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Unit
70. specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously This processing applies to IGMP and MLD HTTP HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communicatio
71. switch ports And the settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the QoS Port Classification parameters in the web interface Click Configuration QoS Port Classification Scroll to select QoS class DP Level PCP and DEI parameters Click the save to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values RON Figure 3 15 1 The QoS Configuration QoS Ingress Port Classification Port QoSclass DP level PCP DEI Tag Class DSCP Based lt gt Y lt gt Y lt gt m lt gt O 1 oy 0 o ow Disabled Oo 2 ov o om jor Disabled O 3 ov o omo se PA 4 ow o om jor Disabled a 5 ov jo ov jo Disabled ry 6 ov o ov ov Disabled m 7 ov jo om jo Disabled m So o Ge oe Disabled D 9 ov lo o x for Disabled o 10 ov lo om o Disabled a 11 lo o ov ox Disabled o 12 oy joy om o Disabled O 13 o o Ao ao ws Disabled O 14 ov lo Om 0 MA Disabled mm 15 0 w o om os Disabled O 16 ov ox 0 MMA 0 Disabled O 17 ov o 0xw 0 Disabled 18 oy lo o o Disabled O 19 ov lo om 0 Disabled E 20 p low low b Disabled O 21 ov 0 om ow Disabled O 22 ov o omo Disabled O 23 ov o ov ow Disabled O 24 ov lo 0 lo Disabled O 25 ov os ov ov Disabled O 26 ov lo o o Disabled
72. table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID Others click gt gt to update the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 86 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 5 3 Port Group Filtering The section describes how to set the IGMP Port Group Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature an user can exert this type of control In some network Application environments as like the metropolitan or multiple dwelling unit MDU installations an user might want to control the multicast groups to which a user on a switch port can belong lt allows the user to control the distribution of multicast services such as IP TV based on some type of subscription or service plan With this feature you can filter multicast joins on a per port basis by configuring IP multicast profiles and associating them with individual switch ports An IGMP profile can contain one or more multicast groups and specifies whether access to the group is permitted or denied If an IGMP profile denying access to a multicast group is applied to a switch port the IGMP join report requesting the stream of IP multicast traffic is dropped and the port is not allowed to receive IP multicast traffic from that group If the filtering action permits access to the multicast group the IGMP report from the port is forwarded for normal processing IGMP filtering controls only IGMP membership join reports and has no relationship to the function tha
73. the other hand if Port A and Port B belong to the same VLAN after terminal devices access the network through Port B they will have access to the same resources as those accessing the network through Port A do which brings security issues To provide user access and ensure data security in the meantime the MAC based VLAN technology is developed MAC based VLANs group VLAN members by MAC address With MAC based VLAN configured the device adds a VLAN tag to an untagged frame according to its source MAC address MAC based VLANs are mostly used in conjunction with security technologies such as 802 1X to provide secure flexible network access for terminal devices 3 11 6 1 Configuration The MAC based VLAN enties can be configured here This page allows for adding and deleting MAC based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries Web Interface To configure MAC address based VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click MAC address based VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the MAC address and VLAN ID 3 Click Save Figure 3 11 6 1 The MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members Delete MAC Address VLAN ID 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 14 12 13 14 15 16 47 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 Currently no entries present Port Members Delete MAC Address VLANID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 25 28 25 26 coso 1 OOOO OO
74. time that transmit path can hold off sending data after reassertion of LPI Rx Tw The link partner s time that receiver would like the transmitter to holdoff to allow time for the receiver to wake from sleep Fallback Receive Tw The link partner s fallback receive Tw A receiving link partner may inform the transmitter of an alternate desired Tw_sys_tx Since a receiving link partner is likely to have discrete levels for savings this provides the transmitter with additional information that it may use for a more efficient allocation Systems that do not implement this option default the value to be the same as that of the Receive Tw_sys tx Echo Tx Tw The link partner s Echo Tx Tw value The respective echo values shall be defined as the local link partners reflection echo of the remote link partners respective values When a local link partner receives its echoed values from the remote link partner it can determine whether or not the remote link partner has received registered and processed its most recent values For example if the local link partner receives echoed parameters that do not match the values in its local MIB then the local link partner infers that the remote link partners request was based on stale information 123 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Echo Rx Tw The link partner s Echo Rx Tw value Resolved Tx Tw The resolved Tx Tw for this link Note NOT the link partner The resolved value t
75. to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters 31 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 from 33 to 126 32 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 6 5 Views The function is used to configure SNMPv3 view The Entry index key are OID Subtree and View Name To create a new view account please check lt Add new view gt button and enter the view information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 28 Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree Web Interface Click SNMP Views Click Add new View Specify the SNMP View parameters Click Save If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset nan Figure 2 6 5 The SNMP Views Configuration Delete View Name View Type OID Subtree O defaut view 4 Sar Delete ViewName View Type OID Subtree Add new view JE Save Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 eo View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view types are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded In
76. to ask switch to display the STP CIST port status for physical ports of the currently selected switch Web Interface To display the STP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree STP Port Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 7 The STP Port status Parameter description eo Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e CIST Role The current STP port role of the CIST port The port role can be one of the following values AlternatePort Backup Port RootPort DesignatedPort Disabled e CIST State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values Blocking Learning Forwarding e Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the STP Port status information by manual 80 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 4 8 Port Statistics After you complete the STP configuration then you could to let the switch display the STP Statistics The Section provides you to ask switch to display the STP Statistics detail counters of bridge ports in the currently
77. to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbour has been detected in order share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbours Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbours it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of the neighbours receiving the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated The recommended value is 4 times given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when an LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including Network Connectivity Devices or other types of links Coordinates Location Latitude Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a max
78. trust the source do not open or s of conf_save from 192 168 20 22 Completed x EX Desktop my Documents 14 My Computer My Recent Amy Network Places Documents 1000913 520111001 Desktop Davi disc_change_v2_5 when download completes Open If Open Folder My Documents config xml XML Document 263 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description Save Click the Save button to store the Configuration to the PC or Server 5 4 2 Import Config This section describes to export the switch Configuration for maintenance needs Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format Web Interface To configure an Import Config Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Browser to select the config file in you device 2 Click Upload Figure 5 4 2 The Import Config fomes YL Upload Choose File to Upload Look in 13679_div pd IMAGE_028 jpg E 116367776 pdf E maGE_040 jpg My Recent E IMAGE _041 jpg __ Documents E eries_Datasheet_02 W pdf Y Baisc_change gt NS El Meraki Fan issue ti i El Meraki NAND flash Desktop Meraki NAND flashi Meraki Project MP Meraki Review Mer 49 microsoft Outlook GE Smart Switches Feature List_20111006 Wi mnucR 3816 2008 G5 235x series Chipeset data_20110901 xIsx out E201 DYT Re 9 Wi pses 2310G_HW SE P5G5 2310G_HW 1 psgs 2352K LED Pr
79. upgrade Save Restore Import Export and Diagnostics 5 1 Restart Device This section describes how to restart switch for any maintenance needs Any configuration files or scripts that you saved in the switch should still be available afterwards Web Interface To configure a Restart Device Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Restart Device 2 Click Yes Figure 5 1 1 The Restart Device Are you sure you want to perform a Restart Parameter description e Restart Device You can restart the switch on this page After restart the switch will boot normally e Buttons Yes Click to Yes then the device will restart No Click to undo any restart action 257 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 5 2 Firmware This section describes how to upgrade Firmware The Switch can be enhanced with more value added functions by installing firmware upgrades 5 2 1 Firmware Upgrade This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the Switch Web Interface To configure a Firmware Upgrade Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Browser to select firmware in you device 2 Click Upload Figure 5 2 1 The Firmware update pr romse wow Parameter description e Browse Click the Browse button to search the Firmware URL and filename e Upload Click the Upload button then the switch will start to upload the firmware from firmware stored location PC or Server i
80. wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered up when traffic is transmitted The devices can exchange information about the devices wakeup time using the LLDP protocol For maximizing the power saving the circuit isn t started at once transmit data are ready for a port but is instead queued until 3000 bytes of data are ready to be transmitted For not introducing a large delay in case that data less then 3000 bytes shall be transmitted data are always transmitted after 48 us giving a maximum latency of 48 us the wakeup time If desired it is possible to minimize the latency for specific frames by mapping the frames to a specific queue done with QOS and then mark the queue as an urgent queue When an urgent queue gets data to be transmitted the circuits will be powered up at once and the latency will be reduced to the wakeup time Web Interface To configure the EEE Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then EEE 2 To evoke which port wants to enable the EEE function To evoke which 3 EEE Urgent Queues level and the range from 1 to 8 the queue will postpone the transmissions until 3000 bytes are ready to be transmitted 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset butto
81. web interface 1 Specify the Client console telent ssh web which you want to monitor 2 Specify the Authentication Method none local radius tacacs 3 Checked Fallback 4 Click Apply Figure 4 11 1 The HTTPS Configuration Authentication Method Configuration Client Authentication Method Fallback console local lt telnet local v ssh local v web local v Parameter description e Client The management client for which the configuration below applies e Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values none authentication is disabled and login is not possible local use the local user database on the switch for authentication radius use a remote RADIUS server for authentication tacacs use a remote TACACS server for authentication e Fallback Enable fallback to local authentication by checking this box If none of the configured authentication servers are alive the local user database is used for authentication This is only possible if the Authentication Method is set to a value other than none or local o Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 256 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Maintenance This chapter describes all of the switch Maintenance configuration tasks to enhance the performance of local network including Restart Device Firmware
82. 000 EE EL LL 2S00066000000000000060000000 alado ee ele es ee ocococococococnocococoocoocoo Sa AA aa aa Saa aa e coscocscccsscccseccsseccssccx PE ee EE 200000000000000000o00o0o0o0o0ooo essossesccoascessosesceccoces ee EEE EEE EEE sosssoscssscccessceccscsescsecx EE ee en ee ee 2 AA NC NAME E Parameter description eo Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Qn Qn is the Queue number QoS queues per port QO is the lowest priority queue Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the Queuing Counters or clear them by manual 46 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 1 6 SFP Information The section describes that switch could display the SFP module detail information which you connect it to the switch The information includes Connector type Fiber type wavelength baud rate and Vendor OUI etc Web Interface To Display the SFP information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then SFP Information 2 To display the SFP Information Figure 3 1 6 The SFP Information Overview SFPLC S10 777010094 70717 none Parameter description e Connector Type Display the connector type for instance UTP SC ST LC and so on e Fiber Type Display the fiber mode for instance Multi Mode
83. 065 7861POE Series User s Manual 26 Port L2 PoE Plus Managed Switch Release 1 38 1 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 O 2012 Signamax Inc All rights reserved All brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 11 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Copyright Purpose Audience CONVENTIONS WARRANTY Disclaimer FCC Warning About This Manual Copyright O 2012 Signamax Inc All rights reserved The products and programs described in this User s Manual are licensed products of Signamax Inc This User s Manual contains proprietary information protected by copyright and this User s Manual and all accompanying hardware and software and documentation are copyrighted No parts of this User s manual may be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable from by any means by electronic or mechanical Including photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use and without the prior express written permission of Signamax Inc This manual gives specific information on how to operate and use the management functions of the 065 7861POE series switches The Manual is intended for use by network administrators who are responsible for operating and maintaining network equipment consequently it assumes a basic working knowledge
84. 12 Revision A3 3 11 5 2 Port Isolation Port Isolation provides for an apparatus and method to isolate ports on layer 2 switches on the same VLAN to restrict traffic flow The apparatus comprises a switch having said plurality of ports each port configured as a protected port or a non protected port An address table memory stores an address table having a destination address and port number pair A forwarding map generator generates a forwarding map which is responsive to a destination address of a data packet The method for isolating ports on a layer 2 switch comprises configuring each of the ports on the layer 2 switch as a protected port or a non protected port A destination address on an data packet is matched with a physical address on said layer 2 switch and a forwarding map is generated for the data packet based upon the destination address on the data packet The data packet is then sent to the plurality of ports pursuant to the forwarding map generated based upon whether the ingress port was configured as a protected or non protected port This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN Web Interface To configure Port Isolation configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Isolation 2 Evoke which port want to enable Port Isolation 3 Click Save Figure 3 11 5 2 The Port Isolation Co
85. 16 Force Authorized 17 Force Authorized 18 Force Authorized 19 Force Authorized 20 Force Authorized 21 Force Authorized Force Authorized 22 23 Force Authorized 24 Force Authorized 25 Force Authorized 26 Force Authorized REEE Rp ee Ge Le ff Eeee Le Le LL fe J ll Save Reset 225 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames Reauthentication Enabled If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port see Aging Period below Reauthentication Period Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds EAPOL Timeout Determines the time
86. 1X e Multi 802 1X e Backend Server Counters These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth e Last Supplicant Client Info Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth Selected Counters e Selected Counters The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is in one of the following administrative states e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty if no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below Attached MAC Addresses e Identity Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth e MAC Address For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server cou
87. 4 5 3 2 The TACACS Accounting Configuration 238 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Disabled 1 Disabled Disabled Figure 4 5 3 3 The RADIUS Configuration Parameter description e Timeout The Timeout which can be set to a number between 3 and 3600 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead 239 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 e Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than O zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration The table has one row
88. CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree CIST Ports parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree CIST Ports 2 Scroll and evoke to set all parameters of CIST Aggregated Port Configuration 3 Evoke to enable or disable the STP then scroll and evoke to set all parameters of the CIST normal Port configuration 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 4 The STP CIST Port Configuration Priority Admin Edge Auto Edge d BPDU Guard ee 128 Non Edge M ica a Forced True M d BPDU Guard o a Non Edge w Non Edge Non Edge Non Edge Non Edge Non Edge Non Edge Y Non Edge v Non Edge Y Non Edge Non Edge v Non Edge M Non Edge Non Edge M Non Edge Non Edge Non Edge Non Edge Non Edge M Non Edge Non Edge M Non Edge Non Edge Non Edge Y Non Edge w Non Edge EEN EEN Ys J if le 1 J a ea 1 152 es HEHEHE Le EJ Jm
89. D 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 10 standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Provider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received ona subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag ID VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic By adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLAN we can perform QoS related configuration for voice data ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality 282 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3
90. Daylight saving end date and time the format is YYYY MM DD HH MM Note The under from and to was displayed what you set on the From and To field information 12 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 2 2 NTP NTP is Network Time Protocol and is used to sync the network time based Greenwich Mean Time GMT If use the NTP mode and select a built in NTP time server or manually specify an user defined NTP server as well as Time Zone the switch will sync the time in a short after pressing lt Apply gt button Though it synchronizes the time automatically NTP does not update the time periodically without user s processing Time Zone is an offset time off GMT You have to select the time zone first and then perform time sync via NTP because the switch will combine this time zone offset and updated NTP time to come out the local time otherwise you will not able to get the correct time The switch supports configurable time zone from 12 to 13 step 1 hour Default Time zone 8 Hrs Web Interface To configure Time in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM NTP 2 Specify the Time parameter in manual parameters 3 Click Save Figure 2 2 2 The NTP configuration Server 1 Server 2 Server3 Server 4 Server 5 Save Reset Parameter description e Server ito 5 Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit rec
91. Down Auto E su x O 9600 Discard Disabled x 21 Down SFP_Auto_AMS x x a 9600 Discard Disabled E 22 Down SFP_Auto_AMS x x O 9600 Discard Disabled x 23 Down SFP_Auto_AMS SE Be m 9600 Discard Disabled x 24 Down SFP_Auto_AMS v 2e dE oO 9600 Discard Disabled x 2510 Dom a i x x o 9600 26 Down Auto 5e x a 9600 Save J Reset 39 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description eo Port This is the logical port number for this row eo Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down e Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port Configured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Auto Speed selects the highest speed that is compatible with a link partner Disabled disables the switch port operation Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed e
92. E or US eo State National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture e County County parish gun Japan district e City City township shi Japan Example Copenhagen e City district City division borough city district ward chou Japan e Block Neighbourhood Neighbourhood block e Street Street Example Poppelvej Leading street direction Leading street direction Example N e Trailing street suffix Trailing street suffix Example SW e Street suffix Street suffix Example Ave Platz e House no House number Example 21 e House no suffix House number suffix Example A 1 2 e Landmark Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University e Additional location info Additional location info Example South Wing eo Name Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jahn 116 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 e Zip code Postal zip code Example 2791 e Building Building structure Example Low Library e Apartment Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 e Floor Floor Example 4 Room no Room number Example 450F e Place type Place type Example Office e Postal community name Postal community name Example Leonia e P O Box Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 e Additional code Additional code Example 1320300003 e Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and
93. ID in which the IP traffic is permitted e IP Address User IP address of the entry e MAC Address Source MAC address e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table by manual others for next up page or entry 211 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 2 ARP Inspection The section describes to configure the ARP Inspection parameters of the switch You could use the ARP Inspection configure to manage the ARP table 4 2 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure ARP Inspection setting including Mode Enabled and Disabled Port Enabled and Disabled Web Interface To configure an ARP Inspection Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration 2 Select Enabled of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 3 Click Save Figure 4 2 1 The ARP Inspection Configuration Mode Disabled w Translate dynamic to static 4 Disabled 2 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled i5 Disabled isabled Disabled E 40 Disabled Ey Ee Disabled Disabled 212 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 213 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description e Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration Enable the Global ARP In
94. If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 To Click the Refresh to refresh a entry of the MVR Statistics Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 7 3 The MVR Statistics Information VLAN ID V1 Reports V2Reports V3 Reports V2 Leaves Received Received Received Received 100 0 0 0 0 Parameter description e VLANID The Multicast VLAN ID e V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports e V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports e V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the MVR Group information by manual others for next up page or entry 108 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 8 LLDP The switch supports the LLDP For current information on your switch model The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP provides a standards based method for enabling switches to advertise themselves to adjacent devices and to learn about adjacent LLDP devices The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is a vendor neutral Link Layer protocol in the Internet Protocol Suite used by network devices for advertising their identity capabilities and neig
95. MD5 or SHA for authentication Authentication Password The length of MD5 Authentication Password is restricted to 8 32 The length of SHA Authentication Password is restricted to 8 40 Privacy Protocol You can set DES encryption for UserName Privacy Password The length of Privacy Password is restricted to 8 32 38 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Configuration This chapter describes all of the basic network configuration tasks which includes the Ports Layer 2 network protocol e g VLANs QoS IGMP ACLs and PoE etc and any setting of the Switch 3 1 Port The section describes to configure the Port detail parameters of the switch Others you could using the Port configure to enable or disable the Port of the switch Monitor the ports content or status in the function 3 1 1 Configuration This chapter describes how to view the current port configuration and how to configure ports to non default settings including Linkup Linkdown Speed Current and configured Flow Control Current Rx Current Tx and Configured Maximum Frame Size Excessive Collision Mode Power Control Web Interface To configure an Current Port Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Configuration 2 Specify the Speed Configured Flow Control Maximum Frame sze Excessive Collision mode and Power Control 3 Click Save Figure 3 1 1 The Port Configuration Refresh
96. Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS e Excessive Collision Mode Configure port transmit collision behavior Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default Restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions Power Control The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled PerfectReach Link up power savings enabled Enabled Both link up and link down power savings enabled e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Port link Status by manual 40 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 1 2 Port Description The section describes to configure the Port s alias or any descriptions for the Port Identity It provides user to write down an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version identification for the system s hardware type software version and networking application Web Interface To configure an Port Description in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Port Description 2 Specify the detail Port alias or description an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version
97. Missing Receive Missing Receive Bad Receive Bad to Server Error from Server Agent Option Circuit ID Remote ID Circuit ID Remote ID 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Transmit Transmit Receive Receive Replace Keep Drop to Client Error from Client Agent Option Agent Option Agent Option Agent Option 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description Transmit to Server The number of packets that are relayed from client to server e Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in errors while being sent to clients e Receive from Server The number of packets received from server e Receive Missing Agent Option The number of packets received without agent information options e Receive Missing Circuit ID The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing Receive Missing Remote ID The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing e Receive Bad Circuit ID The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID e Receive Bad Remote ID The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID Client Statistics e Transmit to Client The number of relayed packets from server to client e Transmit Error The number of packets that resulted in error while being sent to servers e Receive from Client The number of received packets from server 223 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Receive Agent Option The number of received packets with relay agent information option Repl
98. N unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1 AVLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN but it can be a member of multiple Private VLANs Web Interface To configure Private VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click add new Private VLAN configuration 2 Specify the Private VLAN ID and Port Members 3 Click Save Figure 3 11 5 1 The Private VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members Delete PVLANID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Aca Mica Mic fc fa Ma Ja ca Aa ca ca lc M MAMMA AAA a a ca Mc Add New Private VLAN Parameter description e Delete To delete a private VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next save e Private VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID To include a port in a Private VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New Private VLAN Click to add a new private VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the private VLAN can be configured as needed e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved 141 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 values 142 Publication date Oct 20
99. NET SSH Parameter description e Mode Indicates the access management mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable access management mode operation Disabled Disable access management mode operation e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Start IP address Indicates the start IP address for the access management entry e End IP address Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Indicates the end IP address for the access management entry HTTP HTTPS Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP HTTPS interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry SNMP Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry TELNET SSH Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET SSH interface if the host IP address matches the IP address range provided in the entry Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 252 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 8 2 Statistics This section shows you a detailed statistics of the Access Management including HTTP HTTPS SSH TELNET and SSH Web Interface To configure an Assess Management Statistics in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 8 2 The Access Managem
100. OOOO0o00o000000000000 ES Rese 144 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description e Delete To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted on the selected switch e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLANID Indicates the VLAN ID Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New MAC based VLAN Click to add a new MAC based VLAN entry An empty row is added to the table and the MAC based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC based VLAN entry No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The MAC based VLAN entry is enabled on the selected switch unit when you click on Save A MAC based VLAN without any port members on any unit will be deleted when you Click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC based VLANs e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 145 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 11 6 2 Status This section shows MAC based VLAN entries configured by var
101. Port VLAN Mode The allowed values are None or Specific This parameter affects VLAN ingress and egress processing If None is selected a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in frames transmitted on the port This mode is normally used for ports connected to VLAN aware switches If Specific the default value is selected a Port VLAN ID can be configured see below Untagged frames received on the port are classified to the Port VLAN ID If VLAN awareness is disabled all frames received on the port are classified to the Port VLAN ID If the classified VLAN ID of a frame transmitted on the port is different from the Port VLAN ID a VLAN tag with the classified VLAN ID is inserted in the frame e Port VLAN ID Configures the VLAN identifier for the port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 NOTE The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 137 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 11 3 Switch Status The function Switch Status gathers the information of all VLAN status and reports it by the order of Staic NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined Web Interface To Display VLAN membership status n the web interface 1 Click VLAN membership 2 Specify the Staic NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined 3 Display membership
102. Revision A3 o vl unlimited ooo000 OOOOOOO00O000 unlimited unlimited Y 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 E 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2 24 25 26 Save Parameter description Snooping Enabled Enable the Global MLD Snooping Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding enabled Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding Please note that disabling unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding may lead to failure of Neighbor Discovery MLD SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address Using IPv6 Address range Proxy Enabled Enable MLD Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leave messages to the router side Port The Port index what you enable or disable the MLD Snooping function 95 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Fast Leave To evoke to enable the fast leave on the port Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD Querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port Throttling Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously sa
103. Single Mode Tx Central Wavelength Display the fiber optical transmitting central wavelength for instance 850nm 1310nm 1550nm and so on e Baud Rate Display the maximum baud rate of the fiber module supported for instance 10M 100M 1G and so on e Vendor OUI Display the Signamaxr s OUI code which is assigned by IEEE e Vendor Name Display the company name of the module Signamaxr e Vendor P N Display the product name of the naming by module Signamaxr e Vendor Rev Revision 47 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Display the module revision Vendor SN Serial Number Show the serial number assigned by the Signamaxr Date Code Show the date this SFP module was made Temperature Show the current temperature of SFP module Vcc Show the working DC voltage of SFP module Mon1 Bias mA Show the Bias current of SFP module Mon2 TX PWR Show the transmit power of SFP module Mon3 RX PWR Show the receiver power of SFP module 48 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 1 7 EEE The section which allows the user to inspect and configure the current EEE port settings EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is very low traffic utilization or no traffic EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no traffic When a port gets data to be transmitted all circuits are powered up The time it takes to power up the circuits is named wakeup time The default
104. Switch Status by manual 234 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 5 3 Port Status The section describes to provide detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication Web Interface To configure a NAS Port Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify Port which want to check 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 5 3 The NAS Port Statistics CI Retesh JL Clear Parameter description Port State e Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values eo Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states e QoS Class The QoS class assigned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned o Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Port Counters e EAPOL Counters These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Force Authorized 235 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X Single 802
105. TP System settings It allows you to configure STP System settings are used by all STP Bridge instance in the switch Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree Bridge Settings parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree Bridge Settings 2 Scroll to select the parameters and write down available value of parameters in blank field in Basic Settings 3 Evoke to enable or disable the parameters and write down available value of parameters in blank field in Advanced settings 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values 69 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Figure 3 4 1 The STP Bridge Configuration Protocol Version Bridge Priority Forward Delay Max Age Maximum Hop Count Transmit Hold Count Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering Edge Port BPDU Guard Port Error Recovery Port Error Recovery Timeout sae Rese Parameter description Basic Settings e Protocol Version The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP e Bridge Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RS
106. TP bridge e Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transit Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds e Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds and MaxAge must be lt FwdDelay 1 2 Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information to Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops e Transmit Hold Count The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second Advanced Settings e Edge Port BPDU Filtering Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive 70 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 BPDUs Edge Port BPDU Guard Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology Port Error Recovery Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP ope
107. Table of Contents R vision HIStory ireann nagaan A A A a vi INTRODUCTION 0 iii id 1 CHAPTER 1 OPERATION OF WEB BASED MANAGEMENT nonanccaninnnnnncanononcoroncrcocooconcnnonnnanas 2 CONNECTING NETWORK DEVICES ooocccccccccccccccccccononcnnncnononononononananannnannn rana nononononcnnanononnnononcnnnnnnns 4 TWISTED PAIR DEVICES oct tes oot Et Ce AN NP TR AN AT 4 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION cccccssccsscccssccsecceccccsssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseeseeeees 6 221 SYSTEM INFORMA TON A A ae Ea 6 DATAN AMO a E E 6 2 12 CORMGUIATON Noi a A IA DE RAS eaten eae ee Os 9 Y O ad DR OF 10 A Mais 4 An RE AL OE RE MN ne AM A ne LA AE na ten 10 PE 2 MER a A Near nt 11 PS NY EE AR ne tt EU TN 11 AA NN A A le hi Ae E ATA ETS ele ARE M le Selecta 13 O SACCOUNT a a cdo 14 2 BTV USOS A E O Ro I Pe 14 2 32 Privitege LOVE net ee EE id reis 16 O RAN 19 A AA A A A eee 19 eA DAP Y Gece eth oat e a RU een ne A arte cani OLEO 21 225 O O NT 23 225 1 Configuratii cto a 23 2 52 LOJ O A AR a ec A eve WI a non mani rer a ee 24 2 5 3 Detailed LOG iii 25 A dace nert a le a en nt UN tk atte le 26 LOANS Mt lia gee teat 26 20 2 COMMUNES ii SS A RES 28 226 3 USOS aiii 29 2 6 4 GQIOUDS ci AA E A a Ida Aa 31 A LU NY A NA PA i UG LE AA L a RE Dich als 33 276 6 ACCESS ii A A a a on ee ne MES ana 35 POLLA lol tn leida 37 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURATION cnica innata tania ins daran cio 39 E ES PO lA 39 8 1 1 CONIQUrANON a aa aa a aaah 39 32132 POM Desc
108. You can click them for refresh the VLAN entries by manual Or press clear to clean up the VLAN table Others press lt lt or gt gt to upper or down page of the table 135 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 11 2 Ports The function in VLAN Tag Rule Setting user can input VID number to each port The range of VID number is from 1 to 4094 User also can choose ingress filtering rules to each port There are two ingress filtering rules which can be applied to the switch The Ingress Filtering Rule 1 is forward only packets with VID matching this port s configured VID The Ingress Filtering Rule 2 is drop untagged frame You can also select the Role of each port as Access Trunk or Hybrid Web Interface To configure VLAN Port configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Configuration 2 Specify the VLAN Port Configuration parameters 3 Click Save Figure 3 11 2 The VLAN Port Configuration Port PortType Ingress Filtering Frame Type Egress Rule PVID 1 Hybrid_Y 2 3 4 5 Unaware x 8 7 8 Unaware M 9 10 12 Unaware E 13 14 Unaware 15 16 17 Unaware___Y 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 iil KIKE T RRIRIK 1 2222 ES till laaan EE coisicicicis SITIO atajajaltatatatajajla ee ee fo TT Be re ee re mia puid kond pong Put Leu lt lt M UE NE NE Wed QaA alalahlajala Be re re Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid Hybrid i5
109. access points and other equipment where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to main power supply Policer POP3 A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 lt is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both Private VLAN PTP QCE QCL In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN PTP is an acronym
110. ace Agent Option The number of packets which were replaced with relay agent information option Keep Agent Option The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained Drop Agent Option The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent information Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the DHCP Relay Statistics by manual others for clear to clean up the entries 224 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 5 NAS The section describes to configure the NAS parameters of the switch The NAS server can be employed to connect users to a variety of resources including Internet access conference calls printing documents on shared printers or by simply logging on to the Internet 4 5 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure NAS setting of IEEE 802 1X MAC based authentication system and port settings The NAS configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Web Interface To configure a System Configuration of Netwrok Access Server in the web interface ADS GONE COI 10 Select Enabled in the Mode of Netwrok Access Server Configuration Checked Reauthentication Enabled Set Reauthentication Period Default is 3600 seconds Set EAPOL Timeout Default is 30 seconds Set Aging Peroid Default is 300 second
111. ach row describes the ACE that is defined lt is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Web Interface To display the ACL status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then ACL status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the ACL Status Figure 3 2 4 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration ACL Status Combined y Auto refresh O User Ingress Port Frame Type Action Rate Limiter PortCopy Mirror CPU CPUOnce Counter Conflict Loop Detection Any ARP Deny 2 Disabled Disabled Yes No 0 No Static Policy 1 ARP Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled No No 34 No Static Any Any Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled No No 479 No Parameter description eo User Indicates the ACL user e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port e Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames e Action Indicates the
112. ade locally and revert to previously saved values 176 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 15 8 DSCP Translation The section describes the swtich allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress Web Interface To configure the DSCP Translation parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Translation 2 Scroll to set the Ingress Translate and Egress Remap DPO and Remap DP1 Parameters 3 Evoke to enable or disable Classify 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 15 8 The DSCP Translation Configuration i wc a BE BE Es o iii lilk ea E at ma KAKI a at pr Na E e 3 AJA 14 AF13 M esa 177 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description e DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 e Ingress Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation 1 Translate DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of 0 63 DSCP values 2 Classify Cl
113. age of the Switch e g Time Account IP Syslog and SNMP 2 1 System Information After you login the switch shows you the system information This page is default and tells you the basic information of the system including Model Name System Description Contact Device Name System Up Time BIOS Version Firmware Version Hardware Mechanical Version Serial Number Host IP Address Host Mac Address Device Port RAM Size Flash Size and With this information you will know the software version used MAC address serial number how many ports good and so on This is helpful while malfunctioning 2 1 1 Information The switch system information is provided here Web interface To configure System Information in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM System and Information 2 Specify the contact information for the system administrator as well as the name and location of the switch Also indicate the local time zone by configuring the appropriate offset 3 Click Refresh Figure 2 1 1 System Information 065 7861POE for example others model the same GEPoEL2 ESW26K 20 Port 10 100 1000Base T 4 TP 100 1G SFP Combo 2 100 1G 2 5G SFP L2 Plus Managed Switch TJ2950 24TCS L 2011 01 01 02 06 54 Od 02 06 54 v1 00 v1 38 v1 01 v1 01 033905000002 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 00 40 c7 8d 00 d1 115200 64MB 16MB 8192 MAC Addresses
114. agement function allowing only one administrator to configure the system at the same time If there are two or more users using administrator s identity it will allow the only one who logins first to configure the system The rest of users even with administrator s identity can only monitor the system For those who have no administrator s identity can only monitor the system There are only a maximum of three users able to login simultaneously in the 065 7861POE NOTE When you login to the Switch WEB to manager You must first type the Username of the admin Password was blank so when you type after the end Username please press enter Management page to enter WEB When you login 065 7861POE series switch Web UI management you can use both ipv4 ipv6 login to manage To optimize the display effect we recommend you use Microsoft IE 6 0 above Netscape V7 1 above or FireFox V1 00 above and have the resolution 1024x768 The switch supported neutral web browser interface 2 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 NOTE O AS 065 7861POE the function enable dhcp so If you do not have DHCP server to provide ip addresses to the switch the Switch default ip 192 168 1 1 Figure 1 The login page Connect to 192 168 20 15 A The server 192 168 20 15 at GEPOESM ESW26K requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication with
115. ally take over when a primary link goes down STP STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STP compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops Designated Root C D P Designated X Bridge X ile Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology 3 4 1 Bridge Settings The section describes that how to configure the Spanning Tree Bridge and S
116. ames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port MLD is an acronym for Multicast Listener Discovery for IPv6 MLD is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a directly attached link much as IGMP is used in IPv4 The protocol is embedded in ICMPv6 instead of using a separate protocol Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol for Layer 2 IP networks that enables multicast traffic from a source VLAN to be shared with subscriber VLANSs The main reason for using MVR is to save bandwidth by preventing duplicate multicast streams being sent in the core network instead the stream s are received on the MVR VLAN and forwarded to the VLANs where hosts have requested it them Wikipedia NAS is an acronym for Network Access Server The NAS is meant to act as a gateway to guard access to a protected source A client connects to the NAS and the NAS connects to another resource asking whether the client s supplied credentials are valid Based on the answer the NAS then allows or disallows access to the protected resource An example of a NAS implementation is IEEE 802 1X NetBIOS NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not support
117. ange of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option yes no any Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP 6 IPv6 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP IPv6 source address a b c d or Any 32 LS bits DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP e Action Configuration Class QoS Class class 0 7 default basic classification DP Valid DP Level can be 0 3 default basic classification DSCP Valid dscp value can be 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 182 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 183 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 15 11 QCL Status The section will let you know how to configure and shows the QCL status by different QCL users Each row describes the QCE that i
118. arameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 170 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 15 5 Port Tag Remarking The Section provides user to get an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports Others the ports belong to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Tag Remarking in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Tag Remarking Figure 3 15 5 The Port Tag Remarking Click the Port index to set the QoS Port Tag Remarking L Save JL Reset Jl Cancel Parameter description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure tag remarking e Mode Shows the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions
119. are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls There are 3 web pages associated with the manual ACL configuration ACL Access Control List The web page shows the ACEs in a prioritized way highest top to lowest bottom Default the table is empty An ingress frame will only get a hit on one ACE even though there are more matching ACEs The first matching ACE will take action permit deny on that frame and a counter associated with that ACE is incremented An ACE can be associated with a Policy 1 ingress port or any ingress port the whole switch If an ACE Policy is created then that Policy can be associated with a group of ports under the Ports web page There are number of parameters that can be configured with an ACE Read the Web page help text to get further information for each of them The maximum number of ACEs is 64 ACL Ports The ACL Ports configuration is used to assign a Policy ID to an ingress port This is useful to group ports to obey the same traffic rules Traffic Policy is created under the Access Control List page You can you also set up specific traffic properties Action Rate Limiter Port copy etc for each ingress port They will though only apply if the frame gets past the ACE matching without getting matched In that case a counter ass
120. as Backup Configuration Parameter description e Buttons Save Click the Save button to save current setting as Backup Configuration 5 3 4 Restore User This section describes how to restore users information back to the switch Any current configuration files will be restored via XML format Web Interface To configure a Restore User Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Restore User 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 4 The Restore the Backup Configuration Are you sure to restore the Backup Configuration Parameter description e Buttons 262 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Save Click the Save button to restore the Backup Configuration to the switch 5 4 Export Import This section describes how to export and import the Switch configuration Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format 5 4 1 Export Config This section describes to export the Swith Configuration for maintenance needs Any current configuration files will be exported as XML format Web Interface To configure a Export Config Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Save configuration 2 Save the file in your device Figure 5 4 1 The Restore the Backup Configuration File Download Do you want to open or save this file lt Q Name config xml 2 Type XML Document 49 4KB From 192 168 20 22 While files from the Intemet ca useful some files can potentially dot
121. ated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicants MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality e MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx XX XX XX XX XX that is a dash is used as separator betwee
122. ates the Voice VLAN port security mode When the function is enabled all non telephonic MAC addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds Possible port modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation Port Discovery Protocol Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol It will only work when auto detect mode is enabled We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to LLDP or Both Changing the discovery protocol to OUI or LLDP will restart auto detect process Possible discovery protocols are OUI Detect telephony device by OUI address LLDP Detect telephony device by LLDP Both Both OUI and LLDP Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 152 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 12 2 OUI The section describes to Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table The maximum entry number is 16 Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process Web Interface To configure Voice VLAN OUI Table in the web interface 1 Select Add new entry Delete in the Voice VLAN OUI table 2 Specify Telephony OUI Description 3 Click Save Figure 3 12 2 The Voice VLAN OUI Table Voice VLAN OUI Table Delete Telephony OUI Description O 00 01 83 Siemens AG phones O 00 03 6b Cisco phones O 00 0f e2 H3C phones O 00 60
123. ation date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filtering Possible modes are Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation VLAN ID Indicates the Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is a conflict in configuration if the value equals management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 Aging Time Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning aging time The allowed range is 10 to 10000000 seconds It is used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled In other cases it will be based on hardware aging time The actual aging time will be situated between the age_time 2 age_time interval Traffic Class Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class All traffic on the Voice VLAN will apply this class Port Mode Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode When the port mode isn t equal disabled we must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN lt can avoid the conflict of ingress filtering Possible port modes are Disabled Disjoin from Voice VLAN Auto Enable auto detect mode It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached to the specific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically Forced Force join to Voice VLAN Port Security Indic
124. ave Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 247 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 7 2 Switch Status This section shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status Web Interface To configure a Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 7 2 The Port Security Switch Status tiles EA ES RE IE NE Slits p AS 6155253 OS E ES ES RU eee es 65551 Disabled E S A Eee A ES e AN pele Sse A 49 Disabled a Sits Ep eee D ERES apre aS ES Pr Re EU S AE j E EES E Parameter description e User Module Legend
125. ble with the Port of the switch 4 1 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure IP Source Guard setting including Mode Enabled and Disabled Maximum Dynamic Clients 0 1 2 Unlimited Web Interface To configure an IP Source Guard Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration 2 Select Enabled of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 3 Select Maximum Dynamic Clients 0 1 2 Unlimited of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 4 Click Save Figure 4 1 1 The IP Source Guard Configuration Mode Disabled _Translate dynamic to static 2 Disabled Unlimited 3 Disabled Unlimited 4 Disabled Unlimited 5 Disabled Unlimited 6 Disabled Unlimited 7 Disabled Unlimited 8 Disabled Unlimited 9 Disabled Unlimited 10 Disabled Unlimited 41 Disabled Unlimited 12 Disabled Unlimited 13 Disabled Unlimited 14 Disabled Unlimited 45 Disabled Unlimited 46 Disabled Unlimited 47 Disabled i Unlimited 18 Disabled Unlimited 49 Disabled Unlimited 20 Disabled Unlimited 21 Disabled Unlimited 22 Disabled Unlimited 23 Disabled Unlimited 24 Disabled Unlimited 25 Disabled Unlimited 26 Disabled i Unlimited Save Reset
126. cast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment e VLANID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN VLAN Membership The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users are selected it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users and this is by default VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the VLAN entries by manual 138 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 11 4 Port Status The function Port Status gathers the information of all VLAN status and reports it by the order of Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined Web Interface To Display VLAN Port Status n the web interface 1 Click VLAN Port Status 2 Specify the Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined 3 Display Port Status information Figure 3 11 4 The VLAN Port Status for Static user a v SAS PVID Port Type Ingre
127. ceived The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports V1 Leaves Received The number of Received V1 Leaves Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry 101 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 6 5 Group Information The section describes user could set the MLD Snooping Groups Information The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table Web Interface To display the MLD Snooping Group information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Group Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the MLD Snooping Group Information 4 Click Clear to clear the MLD Snooping Groups information Figure 3 6 5 The MLD Snooping Groups Information Port Members VLANID Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Parameter descr
128. ch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated 229 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class Refer to the written documentation for a description of the RADIUS attributes needed in order to successfully identify a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule All 8 octets in the attribute s value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 3 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 3 RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled c
129. ck Add new user 3 Specify the User Name parameter 4 Click Save Figure2 3 1 The Users Account configuration UserName Privilege Level min 15 Add new user O Oo QQ Parameter description e User Name The name identifying the user This is also a link to Add Edit User e Password To type the password The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 Password again To type the password again You must type the same password again in the field 14 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account 15 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 3 2 Privitege Level This page provides an overview of the privilege
130. ct Enabled in the Relay Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration Specify Relay Server IP address Select Enabled in the Relay Information Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration Specify Relay Replace Keep and Drop in the Relay Information Mode of DHCP Relay Configuration Click Save Figure 4 4 1 The DHCP Relay Statistics DHCP Relay Configuration Relay Mode Disabled v Relay Server 0 0 0 0 Relay Information Mode Disabled M Relay Information Policy Replace v Parameter description e Relay Mode Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay mode operation When DHCP relay mode operation is enabled the agent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain And the DHCP broadcast message won t be flooded for security considerations Disabled Disable DHCP relay mode operation e Relay Server Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet domain e Relay Information Mode Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP relay information mode operation When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled the agent inserts specific information option 82 into a DHCP message when forwarding to DHCP server and removes it from a DHCP mes
131. ction ARP Inspection is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through the switch device Auto Negotiation Auto negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link C cc CC is an acronym for Continuity Check lt is a MEP functionality that is able to detect loss of continuity in a network by transmitting CCM frames to a peer MEP CCM CCM is an acronym for Continuity Check Message It is a OAM frame transmitted from a MEP to it s peer MEP and used to implement CC functionality CDP CDP is an acronym for Cisco Discovery Protocol D DEI DEI is an acronym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag DES DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic
132. d Parameter description 0 Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Policy ID Poti El Pot2 Poti S Pot2 vw Mirror Logging Shutdown Disabled MMM Disabled MM Disabled M Disabled Disabled Disabled Y Disabled MM Disabled MM Disabled Y Disabled MMM Disabled MM Disabled Y Disabled W Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Y Disabled Disabled MMA Disabled 1 7682 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 1 through 8 The default value is 1 Action Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit Rate Limiter ID Select which rate limiter to apply on this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16 The default value is Disabled Port Copy Select which port frames are copied on The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number The default value is Disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames
133. d Transmit Total Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets Publication date Oct 2012 44 Revision A3 Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors Rx Undersize The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC Rx Oversize The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC Rx Fragments The number of short 1 frames received with invalid CRC Rx Jabber The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC Rx
134. d device you want to set on the Easy Port and connect to 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 20 1 The Easy Port Configuration Port Members 1 12 13 14 15 16 47 18 19 20 21 2 jajajajajajajaja Voice VLAN Traffic Class Port Security Port Security Action Port Security Limit Spanning Tree Admin Edge Enable v Spanning Tree BPDU Guard Enable v Parameter description e Port Members To evoke which Port wants to enable the Easy Port function e Role To scroll to select what kind device you want to connect and implement with the Easy Port setting e Access VLAN To set the Access VLAN ID it means the switch port access VLAN ID AVID VLAN Mode To scroll to select the VLAN mode with Access Trunk or Hybrid e Voice VLAN If you connect the IP Phone you need to assign the Voice VLAN ID The value of the port number has to be typed into the text box e Traffic Class 200 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 To scroll to select the traffic class for the data stream priority The available value from 0 Low to 7 High If you want the voice has high priority then you can set the value with 7 Port Security To scroll to enable or disable the Port Security function on the Port If you turn on the function then you need to set Port Security limit to allow how man
135. d not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy 3 Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy 5 Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance 6 Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relyi
136. d range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 QI Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the 85 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds QRI Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is O to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is O to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields Or click lt lt to update the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN
137. d to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled on all ports Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1 X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled on all ports Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 Max Reauth Count The number of times the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering
138. de operation e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 254 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 10 HTTPs This section shows you how to use HTTPS to securely access the Switch HTTPS is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication via the browser Web Interface To configure a HTTPS Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of HTTPS Configuration 2 Select Enabled in the Automatic Redirect of HTTPS Configuration 3 Click Save Figure 4 10 1 The HTTPS Configuration Mode Enabled v Automatic Redirect Disabled Parameter description e Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation e Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation Automatically redirect web browser to HTTPS when HTTPS mode is enabled Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation 255 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 11 Auth Method This page shows how to configure a user with authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces Web Interface To configure a Authentication Method Configuration in the
139. deecteooestes 266 AA ae One M RST aea SN bad e tal ne 266 5 52 A E N ET A A Aa EET E aTa aa 267 A le A EEA RON 268 A GLOSSARY OF WEB BASED MANAGEMENT ooconcccnononananananaaaaanannnnnnnn nro noronnornonnnnnnnnnnnananananananas 270 V TEA E RE O O O ANA 270 A NN 271 Dea AE A AE aL 271 O A ea Ry tree el a tenet A 273 A EP PE OEY OE RE eux 273 A A UM SAL Lah S 273 O dhe AON Sieh as Dae ae tM RR SB See a th cae eS Oy RCRA Plt ake 274 O E ne DT caplet tans he oud ta 275 A CORA NEO SOR NR 275 Ni o O a eR AER hie O ae 276 Dn O o e A OY Se en 277 Pcia Ne ed cade Paco eee 2 277 Chek sete le Gh ethene eee einen sia a A ok Se hook Mos 278 Pesos Sn ce oh at Nt Mh St aa La he Soa RR ol ae Lit a bee Se Nn Sot at tn hs ol Lt 279 SN er re RT IE e a De PR AE ea E ee 279 Ma A eck Mets te cl iS te Te A De en Mea ee eda 280 Nh thot tt acted dd eed a SCE ah tad ol ctl A ee aa dell AA er 281 RR Chale sol ee 282 v Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Revision History Release Date Revision v0 91 08 12 2011 A1 V1 14 01 06 2012 A2 V1 38 10 19 2012 A3 vi Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 INTRODUCTION Overview In this user s manual it will not only tell you how to install and connect your network system but configure and monitor the 065 7861POE series switch through the web by RJ 45 serial interface and Ethernet ports step by step Many explanations in detail of hardware and software functions are shown as we
140. ding their own DHCP servers to the network 4 3 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure DHCP Snooping setting including Snooping Mode Enabled and Disabled Port Mode Configuration Trusted Untrusted Web Interface To configure a DHCP Snooping in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of DHCP Snooping Configuration 2 Select Trusted of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 3 Click Save Figure 4 3 1 The DHCP Snooping Configuration Snooping Mode Disabled v g i Es Parameter description e Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When DHCP snooping mode operation is enabled the DHCP request messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allow 217 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation e Port Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are Trusted Configures the port as trusted source of the DHCP messages Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted source of the DHCP messages e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 218 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 3 2 Statistics The section describes to show the DHCP Snooping Statistics information of the switc
141. ds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the RADIUS Status by manual 243 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 6 3 Radius Details This section shows you detailed statistics of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting servers The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Web Interface To configure a RADIUS Details Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify Port which want to check 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 6 3 The RADIUS Authentication Statistics Server a clear Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the RADIUS Statistics information by manual Others you can click the clear to clean up all entries 244 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 7 Port Security This section shows you to to configure the Port Security sett
142. e Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable MM Disable x Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable x Disable Disable Disable Port KA i 3 i i KIK DA O O1 whys gt rss ss mi RIR O O O O O O O O O O O a O Ci a O O O O O O O O O O O O lle Parameter description Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress settings Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for 173 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 individual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress 1 Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox 2 Classify Classification for a port have 4 different values e Disable No Ingress DSCP Classification e DSCP 0 Classify if incoming or translated if enabled DSCP is 0 e Selected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP e All Classify all DSCP
143. e Static IP Source Guard Table Delete Port VLANID IP Address MAC address Delete Port VLANID IP Address delete Ji I Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save eo Port The logical port for the settings e VLANID The vlan id for the settings e IP Address Allowed Source IP address IP Mask It can be used for calculating the allowed network with IP address e MAC address Allowed Source MAC address e Adding new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table Specify the Port VLAN ID IP address and IP Mask for the new entry Click Save e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 210 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 1 3 Dynamic Table The section describes to configure the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch You could use the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table configure to manage the entries Web Interface To configure a Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Start from port VLAN ID IP Address and entries per page 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 1 3 The Dynamic Table Refresh Port VLANID IP Address MAC Address o No more entes Parameter description eo Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLANID VLAN
144. e maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted the order sequence cannot be changed an the priority is highest Web Interface To configure Access Control List in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Configuration 2 Click the button to add a new ACL or use the other ACL modification buttons to specify the editing action i e edit delete or moving the relative position of entry in the list 3 To specific the parameter of the ACE 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values 6 When editing an entry on the ACE Configuration page note that the Items displayed depend on various selections such as Frame Type and IP Protocol Type Specify the relevant criteria to be matched for this rule and set the actions to take when a rule is matched such as Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging and Shutdown Figure 3 2 3 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Or Cea Remove Ar Ingress Port Frame Type Action RateLimiter PortCopy Mirror Logging Shutdown Count peo Permit M Policy 1 a Policy 2 Ml Disabled M Any Port2 M Disabled Disabled M Disabled M 802 1Q Tagged VLAN ID Filter Tag Priority
145. e presence of traffic When switch receives packet s looping detection frame MAC address the same as oneself from port show Looping happens The port will be locked when it received the looping detection frames 3 18 1 Configuration The section describes how to inspect the current Loop Protection configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Loop Protection parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Loop Protection Configuration 2 Evoke to select enable or disable the port loop Protection 3 Set the parameter and select the action when looping been detected 5 Click the apply to save the setting 6 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 18 1 The Loop Protection Configuration General Settings Global Configuration Enable Loop Protection Enable y Transmission Time 5 Shutdown Time 180 Port Configuration Action lt gt Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port Shutdown Port 00 30 0 20N
146. e to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server eo State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled RADIUS Accounting Servers o The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server e IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server o State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled 242 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X secon
147. eb interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Storm Control Configuration 2 Evoke to select the frame type to enable storm control 3 Scroll to set the Rate Parameters 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 15 12 The Storm Control Configuration Frame Type Enable Rate pps Unicast O 1 j Multicast O Broadcast Reset Parameter description Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here Unicast Multicast or Broadcast e Enable Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type e Rate The rate unit is packets per second pps Valid values are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K or 1024K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K The 1 kpps is actually 1002 1 pps e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 186 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 16 Thermal Protection The section allows the user to inspect and configure the current setting for controlling thermal protection Thermal protection is used to protect the chip from getting overheated 3 16 1 Configuration The section describes the user to inspect and configure the current s
148. ection describes to show the each port NAS status information of the switch The status includes Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID QoS Class and Port VLAN ID Web Interface To configure a NAS Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 5 2 The Network Access Server Switch Status Admin State Port State Last Source LastID QoS Class Port VLANID Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled Force Authorized Globally Disabled v ort 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 3 10 11 12 1 14 15 16 Y 18 19 20 a 2 2 2 25 26 Parameter description Port The swi
149. ed en lire tap ire ne as er eE 225 425 2 SICA EREE E E iio E ae 233 4 5 3 POr Stas 2 A Lt dm ve See a OS aod 235 BIN A a 238 4 61 GOMMQUIATION ato atada 238 4 6 2 Radius OVEIVICW 5 0 A A A tt zi 242 456 3 Radius Petals bres Gite 244 4 7 PORT SECURITY fie acest cave sorte ile Heats Avent betes havea tease OE a a e eE eri 245 ALA LIME COMO ii e rio liaise ieee conde 245 47 2 SWIN StA Stanan dit Ae ies ete erat alla E LEE AOA os eds dled 26 Ades E E ah 248 4 73 POM S1AtUS cB ek Ate EEA eee aces cae hd eee he ec he See DS ee LS al oe RAA et 250 4 8 ACCESS MANAGEMENT ok hehe aes eae Be ti ee i to 251 4 81 GONTIQUIANON coa cias oi ld aaa 251 AB SIALSTICS EEE anche A A A 253 ASS LL LA US te nn nr Me M M AN mL ee a E ne 254 ALO IPS ic ee AL ha via a dre EE Le nn ee ent ne Lot 255 As AUTH METHOD batida ana iba 256 CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE cuca 257 5 aisar D e E E EA SEE A a Id 257 iv Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 5 2 FIRMWARE ta a ta ee dre vei einen ete ete 258 5 2 1 Firmware Upgrade ren item a ea 258 DA Mae Selec A ad o 259 NO EE E aie E E tent ette cde dakessedtasdds de d c tane see 261 5 3 1 Factory Defaults vio tt et i dnd AIRE ria 261 AS SS A 261 A IS AAA A A A E 262 IN A NN 262 5 AVEX PORT A IMPOR Tota A idee dea se dut tiled ae aha 263 5 4 1 Export CONT iti i A M sabia nie adc pa 263 5 4 2 IMport Config ales ees E ee ee i es 264 5 5 DIAGNOSTICS 2 22 A nn da es re ee scundas vastudhdadastbarsureedadesde
150. ed links Web Interface To configure the Trunk Aggregation Hash mode and Aggregation Group in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Static Trunk and then Aggregation Mode Configuration 2 Evoke to enable or disable the aggregation mode function Evoke Aggregation Group ID and Port members 3 Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 3 1 1 The Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCP UDP Port Number maj Port Members o a PS 5 rmal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 00000000000000 00 00 010 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 O0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0000000000000 o gt 000000001000 010 0 0000000000000 Ole O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e 0000000000 10100 0e 000001000100 010 01 000000000000 00 0 0 010 001010 0101010 00000000000000 00 00000000000 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000000000000 0 00 0010 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 000 0 00 00 00 0 0 00000000000000 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0000000000000 Os 000001010000 01010018 0000000000 1010 010 0000000000000 0 000000000000 OC O18 oooo0oo0oo0oo0oo0oo0o0o0oo0oo00S 60 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description Hash Code Contributors e Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calc
151. ed on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP 276 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 NFS NTP OAM address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model NFS is an acronym for Network File System It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persistent storage over a computer network NTP is an acronym for Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems NTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer OAM is an acronym for Operation Administration and Maintenance It is a protocol described in ITU T Y 1731 used to implement carrier ethernet functionality MEP functionality like CC and RDI is based on this Optional TLVs OUI PCP PD PHY PING ALLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame OUl is the organizationally unique
152. efault the active management VLAN is VLAN 1 but you can designate any VLAN as the management VLAN using the Management VLAN window Only one management VLAN can be active at a time When you specify a new management VLAN your HTTP connection to the old management VLAN is lost For this reason you should have a connection between your management station and a port in the new management VLAN or connect to the new management VLAN through a multi VLAN route 3 11 1 VLAN Membership The VLAN membership configuration for the selected switch unit switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 4096 VLANs are supported This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN Web Interface To configure VLAN membership configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLAN membership Configuration 2 Specify Management VLAN ID 0 4094 3 Click Save Figure 3 11 1 The VLAN Membership Configuration 1 fia Port Members Delete VLANID VLAN Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 O 1 defaut AMM Port Members 1J2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1810 20 21 22 23 24 defaut AMAMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMIAMIVA Cm Parameter description e Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the selected switch If none of the ports of this switch are members of a VLAN th
153. elete To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values 147 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 1 Ethernet 2 LLC 3 SNAP Gi NOTE On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected e Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types 1 For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600 Oxffff 2 For LLC Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string 0x00 Oxff b SSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff 3 For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub values a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is value in format of xx xx xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00 Oxff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In
154. en 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen Figure 3 9 4 The LLDP MED Neighbours information LLDP MED Neighbour Information Auto refresh O No LLDP MED neighbour information found Gi Note If your network without any device supports LLDP MED then the table will show No LLDP MED neighbour information found Parameter description Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition LLDP MED Endpoint Devices as defined in TIA 1057 are located at the IEEE 802 LAN network edge and participate in IP communication service using the LLDP MED framework Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the fol
155. en the delete checkbox will be greyed out you cannot delete that entry during the next Save e VLANID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e VLAN Name Indicates the name of VLAN VLAN Name can only contain alphabets or numbers VLAN name should contain at least one alphabet VLAN name can be edited for the existing 134 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 VLAN entries or it can be added to the new entries o Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected switch unit when you click on Save The VLAN is thereafter present on the other switch units but with no port members The check box is greyed out when VLAN is displayed on other switches but user can add member ports to it A VLAN without any port members on any unit will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt
156. ent Statistics Interface Received Packets Allowed Packets Discarded Packets HTTP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description e Interface The interface type through which the remote host can access the switch e Received Packets Number of received packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled e Allowed Packets Number of allowed packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled e Discarded Packets Number of discarded packets from the interface when access management mode is enabled e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the Access Management Statistics information by manual Others you can click the clear button to clean up all entries 253 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 9 SSH This section shows you to use SSH Secure SHell to securely access the Switch SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication Web Interface To configure a SSH Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of SSH Configuration 2 Click Save Figure 4 9 1 The SSH Configuration Mode Parameter description e Mode Indicates the SSH mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SSH mode operation Disabled Disable SSH mo
157. entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns which are Port 227 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 The port number for which the configuration below applies Admin State If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the po
158. ents the PoE operating mode for the port Disabled PoE disabled for the port Enabled Enables PoE IEEE 802 3af at eo Priority The Priority represents the ports priority There are three levels of power priority named Low High and Critical The priority is used in the case where the remote devices requires more power than the power supply can deliver In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turn off starting from the port with the highest port number e Maximum Power The Maximum Power value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts that can be delivered to a remote device NoTE If you want to set the Port support IEEE802 3at then you can set the Maximum allowed value is 30W o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 128 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 9 2 Status This page allows the user to inspect the current status for all PoE ports The section show all port Power Over Ethernet Status Web Interface To Display Power Over Ethernet Status in the web interface 1 Click Status 2 Display Power Over Ethernet Status Information 3 Click Refresh Figure 3 9 2 The Power Over Ethernet Status Power Over Ethernet Status Autores O AAA A Rire sens 1 0 oma om om mA PoE E tumad OFF P 2 0 om om om 0 ma Le A OFF PEE 3 0 om ova om 0 ma tow Aerop OFF POE 4 0 omy
159. equired by the QCE and pressing Refresh button e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column e Modification Buttons You can modify each QCE QoS Control Entry in the table using the following buttons Inserts a new QCE before the current row 8 Edits the QCE Moves the QCE up the list Moves the QCE down the list Deletes the QCE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the QCE listings e Port Members Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry By default all ports will be checked o Key Parameters Key configuration are described as below Tag Value of Tag field can be Any Un tag or Tag VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1 4095 or Any user can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs 181 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any
160. es This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet 2 4 1 IPV4 The IPv4 address for the switch could be obtained via DHCP Server for VLAN 1 To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment Configure the switch managed IP information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Web Interface To configure an IP address in the web interface 1 Click System IP Configuration 2 Specify the IPv4 settings and enable DNS proxy service if required 3 Click Save Figure2 4 1 The IP configuration Configured Current DHCP Client O Rene IP Address 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 1 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 IP Router 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WANID nt DNS Server 0000 0 0 0 0 19 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce t
161. es and numbers of the port in the switch e RAM size The size of the RAM in this switch e Flash size The size of the flash memory in this switch e Bridge FDB size To display the bridge FDB size information e Transmit Queue To display the device s transmit hardware priority queue information 7 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 e Maximum Frame size To display the device s maximum frame size information 8 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 1 2 Configuration You can identify the system by configuring the contact information name and location of the switch Web interface To configure System Information in the web interface 1 Click System System Information Configuration 2 Write System Contact System Name System Location information in this page 3 Click Save Figure 2 1 2 System Information configuration System Information Configuration System Contact System Name GEPoESM ESW26K System Location Parameter description e System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 e System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9
162. eter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save eo Port The logical port for the settings You can evoke to enable the port to join filtering Group e Filtering Groups The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 99 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 6 4 Status The section describes when you complete the MLD Snooping and how to display the MLD Snooping Status and detail information It will help you to find out the detail information of MLD Snooping status Web Interface To display the MLD Snooping Status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the MLD Snooping Status Information 4 Click Clear to clear the MLD Snooping Status Figure 3 6 4 The MLD Snooping Status Parameter description e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently e Host Version Working Host Version currently e Querier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE e Queries Transmitted 100 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 The number of Transmitted Queries Queries Received The number of Received Queries V1 Reports Re
163. etting for controlling thermal protection Thermal protection is used to protect the chip from getting overheated When the temperature exceeds the configured thermal protection temperature ports will be turned off in order to decrease the power consumption It is possible to arrange the ports with different priorities Each priority can be given a temperature at which the corresponding ports shall be turned off Web Interface To configure the Thermal Protection in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Thermal Protection Configuration 2 Specify the temperature in the priority O to 3 3 Scroll to set the Priority 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 1 The Thermal Protection Configuration 187 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description Temperature settings for priority groups The temperature at which the ports with the corresponding priority will be turned off eo Priority The criteria index for thermal protect trigger temperature The index from 0 to 3 e Temperature To set the temperature criterion to trigger the thermal protect Gi NoTE The temperature means the MAC and PHY chipset s TA temperature not PSU device temperature or environment temperature Please don t set environment temperature limitation value e Port priorities The priority the port
164. ew MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise Web Interface To configure a Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Port which you want to monitor 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 7 3 The Port Security Port Status Port Security Port Status Port 1 CRT MAC Address VLANID State Time of Addition Age Hold No MAC addresses attached Parameter description e MAC Address VLAN ID The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed o State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic e Time of Addition Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port e lt Age Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seco
165. formation and GIP GVRP state machine maintain the contents of Dynamic VLAN Registration Entries for each VLAN and propagate these information to other GVRP aware devices to setup and update their knowledge database the set of VLANs associated with currently active members and through which ports these members can be reached 3 14 1 Configuration This page allows you to configure the basic GVRP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure GVRP Port Configuration in the web interface 1 Click GVRP configure 2 Specify GVRP Configuration Parameters 3 Click Save Figure 3 14 1 The GVRP Global Configuration Parameter description e GVRP Mode 157 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 GVRP Mode is a global setting to enable the GVRP globally select Enable from menu and to disable GVRP globally select Disable Port The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure per port GVRP settings There are three configuration settings which can be configured on per port bases GVRP Mode e GVRP rrole 1 GVRP Mode This configuration is to enable disable GVRP Mode on perticular port locally e Disable Select to Disable GVRP mode on this port Enable Select to Enable GVRP mode on this port The default value of configuration is disable 2 GVRP rrole This configuration is used to
166. ge network resources R RARP RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP RADIUS RADIUS is an acronym for Remote Authentication Dial In User Service It is a networking protocol that provides centralized access authorization and accounting management for people or computers to connect and use a network service RDI RDI is an acronym for Remote Defect Indication It is a OAM functionallity that is used by a MEP to indicate defect detected to the remote peer MEP RSTP In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP SHA SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length Shaper A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It is located after the ingress queues SMTP SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that u
167. gging operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Indicates the port shut down operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame 56 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Modification Buttons You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons O Inserts a new ACE before the current row e Edits the ACE row O Moves the ACE up the list D Moves the ACE down the list 0 Deletes the ACE O The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh clear Remove All You can click them for refresh the ACL configuration or clear them by manual Others remove all to clean up all ACL configurations on the table 57 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 2 4 ACL Status The section describes how to shows the ACL status by different ACL users E
168. h The statistics show only packet counters when DHCP snooping mode is enabled and relay mode is disabled And it doesn t count the DHCP packets for DHCP client Web Interface To configure a DHCP Snooping Statistics Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Port which you want to monitor 2 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 3 2 The DHCP Snooping Port Statistics a RE Receive Packets Transmit Packets Rx Discover Tx Discover Rx Offer Tx Offer Rx Request Tx Request Rx Decline Tx Decline Rx ACK Tx ACK Rx NAK Tx NAK Rx Release Tx Release Rx Inform Tx Inform Rx Lease Query Tx Lease Query Rx Lease Unassigned Tx Lease Unassigned Rx Lease Unknown Tx Lease Unknown Rx Lease Active Tx Lease Active 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description e Rx and Tx Discover The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Offer The number of offer option 53 with value 2 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Request The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Decline The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx ACK The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx NAK The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Release The number of release option 53 with value 7 packe
169. h 7 DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 122 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 8 5 EEE By using EEE power savings can be achieved at the expense of traffic latency This latency occurs due to that the circuits EEE turn off to save power need time to boot up before sending traffic over the link This time is called wakeup time To achieve minimal latency devices can use LLDP to exchange information about their respective tx and rx wakeup time as a way to agree upon the minimum wakeup time they need This page provides an overview of EEE information exchanged by LLDP Web Interface To show LLDP EEE neighbors 1 Click LLDP than click EEE to show discover EEE devices 2 Click Refresh for manual update web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen Figure 3 8 5 The LLDP Neighbors EEE information LLDP Neighbors EEE Information Auto refresh O Local Port Tx Tw RxTw Fallback Receive Tw Echo Tx Tw Echo Rx Tw Resolved Tx Tw Resolved Rx Tw EEE activated No LLDP EEE information found Gi Note If your network without any devices which enables EEE function then the table will show No LLDP EEE information found Parameter description Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted Tx Tw The link partners maximum
170. h port 3 Scroll to disabled enable TX Only and RX Only to set the Port mirror mode 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 21 1 The Mirror Configuration Port to mirror on Mode Disabled M Disabled M Disabled sl Disabled 4 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled M Disabled Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 a Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled x Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled E Disabled x Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled v Disabled Disabled Disabled M lt lt Disabled Disabled Disabled vw Disabled iM a o zZ amp i Parameter description e Port to mirror on Port to mirror also Known as the mirror port Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port Disabled disables mirroring 202 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Mirror Port Configuration The following table is used for Rx and Tx enabling Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Mode Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only Frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the mirror por
171. hat is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP Resolved Rx Tw The resolved Rx Tw for this link Note NOT the link partner The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the LLDP Neighbors information by manual 124 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 8 6 Port Statistics Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole switch while local counters refer to per port counters for the currently selected switch Web Interface To show LLDP Statistics 1 Click LLDP then click Port Statistics to show LLDP counters 2 Click Refresh for manual update web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen 4 Click Clear to clear all counters Figure 3 8 6 The LLDP Port Statistics information Global Counters CN Refresh Neighbour entries were last changed at 2011 01 01 00 00 00 20468 sec ago E Total Neighbours Entries Added 0 Total Neighbours Entries Deleted 0 Total Neighbours Entries Dropped 0 Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out 0 Local Counters Local Port TxFrames RxFrames RxErrors Frames Discarded TLVs Discarded TLVs Unrecognized Org Discarded Age Outs 0 coocoooo0o0o0oooonoooooo
172. hat or the next closest VLAN Table match Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration 2 Evoke to select enable or disable Snooping IGMP Querier Specify the parameters in the blank field 3 Click the refresh to update the data or click lt lt or gt gt to display previous entry or next entry 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 2 The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration VLANID Snooping Enabled IGMP Querier Compatibility RV Ql sec QRI 0 1 sec LLQI 0 1 sec URI sec 1 O Parameter description VLAN ID It displays the VLAN ID of the entry Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected IGMP Querier A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This Router is called the Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is IGMP Auto Forced IGMPv1 Forced IGMPv2 Forced IGMPv3 default compatibility value is IGMP Auto Rv Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowe
173. hbors on a IEEE 802 local area network principally wired Ethernet The protocol is formally referred to by the IEEE as Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery specified in standards document IEEE 802 1AB 3 8 1 LLDP Configuration You can per port to do the LLDP configuration and the detail parameters the settings will take effect immediately This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings Web Interface To configure LLDP 1 Click LLDP configuration 2 Modify LLDP timing parameters 3 Set the required mode for transmitting or receiving LLDP messages 4 Specify the information to include in the TLV field of advertised messages 5 Click Save Figure 3 8 1 The LLDP Configuration Tx Interval seconds TxHold 3 lJtimes Tx Delay R seconds Tx Reinit 2 seconds Optional TLVs Mode CDP aware Port Descr Sys Name Sys Descr Sys Capa Mgmt Addr Disabled Mi Disabled Disabled 4 Disabled v Disabled Disabled Disabled Ba Disabled v Disabled Disabled Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled Disabled Disabled vw Disabled Disabled Disabled Ka Disabled Disabled EA Disabled Disabled 152 Disabled Disabled Disabled x ort 1 2 3 4 5 6 KA 8 El ODOOODOQOOOODOODOODOOOOOOODOOO0O000 STE KSI SSIS SI CSI CSCS KS CSS daa EEEE AAEE AAA AAAA AA AAE AAA ANAL AAAA AA AEA AAK Eos 109 Publication da
174. he LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbors table If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbor devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch Note When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but gets when the hold time is exceeded Port Descr Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Descr Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Capa Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted Mgmt Addr Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 111 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 8 2 LLDP Neighbours This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbours The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected The columns hold the following information Web Interface To show LLDP neighbours 1 Click LLDP Neighbours 2 Click Refresh for manual
175. he configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation IP Router Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation SNTP Server Provide the IP address of the SNTP Server in dotted decimal notation DNS Server Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 to 4095 DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled DUT will relay DNS requests to the current configured DNS server on DUT and reply as a DNS resolver to the client device on the network 20 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 4 2 IPV6 This section describes how to configure the switch managed IPv6 information The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration And the Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page The Configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration The Current column is used to show the active IPv6 configuration Web Interface To configure Management IPv6 of the switch in the web interface 1 Click System IPv6 Configuration 2 Specify the IPv6 settings and enable Auto Configuration service if required 3 Click Save Figure2 4 2 The IPv6 configuration IPv6 Configura
176. he frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time 3 10 1 Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here Web Interface To configure MAC Address Table in the web interface Aging Configuration 1 Click configuration 2 Specify the Disable Automatic Aging and Aging Time 3 Click Save MAC Table Learning 1 Click configuration 2 Specify the Port Members Auto Disable Secure 3 Click Save Static MAC Table Configuration 1 Click configuration and Add new Static entry 2 Specify the VLAN IP and Mac address Port Members 3 Click Save Figure 3 10 1 The MAC Address Table Configuration Disable Automatic Aging O Port Members 15
177. he section describes to port statistics of GARP for all switch ports The port statistics relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display GARP Port statistics in the web interface 1 Click GARP statistics 2 Scroll which port you want to display the GARP Counter information 3 Click Refresh to modify the GARP statistics information Figure 3 13 2 The GARP Port Statistics Parameter description e Port The Port column shows the list of all ports for which per port GARP statistics are shown e Peer MAC Peer MAC is MAC address of the neighbour Switch from with GARP frame is received e Failed Count explain Failed count here e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the GARP Port Statistics information by manual 156 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 14 GVRP GVRP is an application based on Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP mainly used to automatically and dynamically maintain the group membership information of the VLANs The GVRP offers the function providing the VLAN registration service through a GARP application It makes use of GARP Information Declaration GID to maintain the ports associated with their attribute database and GARP Information Propagation GIP to communicate among switches and end stations With GID in
178. hecked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assignea This option is only available for single client modes i e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor gt VLANs gt VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used e The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet
179. hich are Port The port number to which the configuration below applies e Mode Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port e Limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The switch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses e Action If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent everytime the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new address 246 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 will be
180. ht icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the GVRP Port Ststistics information by manual 159 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 15 QoS The switch support four QoS queues per port with strict or weighted fair queuing scheduling It supports QoS Control Lists QCL for advance programmable QoS classification based on IEEE 802 1p Ethertype VID IPv4 IPv6 DSCP and UDP TCP ports and ranges High flexibility in the classification of incoming frames to a QoS class The QoS classification looks for information up to Layer 4 including IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP IPv4 TCP UDP port numbers and user priority of tagged frames This QoS classification mechanism is implemented in a QoS control list QCL The QoS class assigned to a frame is used throughout the device for providing queuing scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class The switch support advanced memory control mechanisms providing excellent performance of all QoS classes under any traffic scenario including jumbo frame A super priority queue with dedicated memory and strict highest priority in the arbitration The ingress super priority queue allows traffic recognized as CPU traffic to be received and queued for transmission to the CPU even when all the QoS class queues are congested 3 15 1 Port Classification The section allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all
181. i No Group entries Save Reser o Feres Port Members Delete GroupName VLANID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8T9 101121214 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23124 25 26 ED IC E e ECEE m FER Parameter description Delete To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save e Group Name A valid Group Name is a string of at most 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 no special character is allowed Whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be perused by any other existing mapping entry on this page e VLAN ID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table the Group Name VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry 149 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 o Buttons
182. icast packet to the member ports and in nature avoids wasting the bandwidth while IP multicast packets are running over the network This is because a switch that does not support IGMP or IGMP Snooping cannot tell the multicast packet from the broadcast packet so it can only treat them all as the broadcast packet Without IGMP Snooping the multicast packet forwarding function is plain and nothing is different from broadcast packet A switch supported IGMP Snooping with the functions of query report and leave a type of packet exchanged between IP Multicast Router Switch and IP Multicast Host can update the information of the Multicast table when a member port joins or leaves an IP Multicast Destination Address With this function once a switch receives an IP multicast packet it will forward the packet to the members who joined in a specified IP multicast group before The packets will be discarded by the IGMP Snooping if the user transmits multicast packets to the multicast group that had not been built up in advance IGMP mode enables the switch to issue IGMP function that you enable IGMP proxy or snooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This interface is the upstream interface The router on the upstream interface should be running IGMP 3 5 1 Basic Configuration The section describes how to set the basic IGMP snooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This
183. ick to enable Classification at Ingress side e Egress There are following configurable parameters for Egress side 1 Remap DPO Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 2 Remap DP1 Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 There is following configurable parameter for Egress side e Remap Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 178 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 15 9 DSCP Classification The section describes to teach user to configure and allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value Others the settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the DSCP Classification parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Translation 2 Scroll to set the DSCP Parameters 3 Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 15 9 The DSCP Classification Configuration QoS Class DPL DSCP A V lt 0 BE M 0 BE 0 BE Y 0 BE 0 BE M 0 BE a lt 0 1 0 1 0 1 Y 0 0 BE
184. imum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance Map Datum 115 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean Civic Address Location IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI e Country code The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK D
185. information Figure 3 11 3 The VLAN Membership Status for Combined users VLAN Membership Status for Combined users Combined Auto refresh StartfromVLAN 1 wihi20 entiesperpage I lt lt gt gt Port Members VLANID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 Bauna Parameter description VLAN USER You can scroll to select one kind VLAN user as below VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configurations such as PVID and UVID Currently we support the following VLAN user types Web SNMP These are referred to as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server MVRP Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol MVRP allows dynamic registration and deregistration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP allows dynamic registration and deregistration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multi
186. ings of the Switch You can use the Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses 4 7 1 Limit Control This section shows you to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch You can use the Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses Web Interface To configure a System Configuration of Limit Control in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of System Configuration 2 3 Checked Aging Enabled Set Aging Period Default is 3600 seconds To configure a Port Configuration of Limit Control in the web interface 1 2 3 4 Select Enabled in the Mode of Port Configuration Specify the maximum number of MAC addresses in the Limit of Port Configuration Set Ation Trap Shutdown Trap amp Shutdown Click Save Figure 4 7 1 The Port Security Limit Control Configuration Reopen Reopen Reopen Reopen Reopen Reopen Reopen Reopen SE Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 245 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description System Configuration e Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions a
187. ious MAC based VLAN users Currently we support following VLAN User types NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Web Interface To Display MAC based VLAN configured in the web interface 1 Click MAC based VLAN Status 2 Specify the Staic NAS Combined 3 Display MAC based information Figure 3 11 6 2 The MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static Port Members MAC Address VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 93 40 44 42 13 14 15 16 47 10 43 20 24 22 23 24 25 26 NG ais its sor ee ea SS A Parameter description e MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLANID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the MAC based VLAN Memebership information by manual 146 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 11 7 Protocol based VLAN This section describe Protocol based VLAN The Switch support Protocol include Ethernet LLC SNAP Protocol LLC The Logical Link Control LLC data communication protocol layer is the upper sub layer of the Data Link Layer which is itself layer 2 just above the Physical Layer in the seven layer OSI reference model It provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for seve
188. ip acc nan oran cnn nro nro nr nn nn naar 141 3 1152 Port Ol MON x nn AR AE A AAA 143 3 11 6 MAC based VLAN ot pidas 144 31161 CONIQU Meta aiii deidades 144 OLOR States taria a A devon adie deat vate donut EEE re A vases 146 3 11 7 PROTOCOL BASED VLAN ita vats denen is 147 3 11 151 Protocol to Group ui a 147 3 11 7 2 Groupto VLAN daa ainda 149 IZ VOICENLAN acacia it a ee ea 151 8 12 1 Configuration E nn Re At En ee en NE nn css 151 3 22 OUl A el a ets dre en ten en ee A ln nn 153 JUS OARE ca ci de asii dai Sea Uri LL aber sia cast A 154 D213 1 CONTQUIATION 2h58 ef lidia dad 154 IABL SAUS UCSI nt ERA ea tl een do A oe 156 3 14 GVR Piste cee en ne A dh ie dd 157 9 14 1 COMTQUIATION is A A AA A edness dads aa ate 157 3 142 SIAUSIICS 5 asis a0 be A day se a SMS hc ee ANNE Ss Ata 159 S215 QOS MU atl behets ee ohne ie oa opie Sad ale ae aie mt Te MALE ate 160 9 19 1 POrtCIASSINICATION cia li latente 160 A A aise A fe dre serment en ei iaae PMR SAS NB tnt 163 3 15 38 POM SCREQUICK semer A ST rene E eane v to MT sr rise elses 165 111 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 IADA NRO SHADING tt A ADE dt AR R 168 9215 5 Port Tag REMAKING ico ia 171 32 19 6 POM DSGP iris ee O ON od OL e O eg le ORE en 173 3 15 7 DSCP Based QOS EEE E EEA E EE E E E A T 175 315 8 DS CPT SIMON ti SD AA A a cia 177 3 15 9 DSCP C F 1110721112 PEE EE EEE diia 179 3 15 10 QoS Control List Configuration ss 180 EA O E BE O
189. iption Navigating the MLD Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MLD Group Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest MLD Group Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The will use the last entry of the currently displayed as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over MLD Snooping Information Table Columns VLAN ID VLAN ID of the group Groups Group address of the group displayed Port Members Ports under this group 102 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically e Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them for refresh the IGMP Group Status by manual others for next up page or entry 103 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 6 6 IPv6 SSM Information The section describes the user to configure the
190. is page The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To display the IGMP Snooping Group Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Group Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the IGMP Snooping Groups Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 5 5 The IGMP Snooping Groups Information 1 and Port Members VLANID Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Parameter description Navigating the IGMP Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table IGMP Group Table Columns e VLANID VLAN ID of the group Groups Group address of the group displayed e Port Members Ports under this group e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically Upper right
191. is entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means it must first be ensured that the value is set correctly e Authentication Protocol Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible authentication protocols are 29 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 None No authentication protocol MDS An optional flag to indicate that this user uses MD5 authentication protocol SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Password A string identifying the authentication password phrase For MD5 authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocols are None No privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user uses DES authentication protocol e Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy password phrase The allowed s
192. is from 720 to 720 minutes aylight Saving Daylight saving is adopted in some countries If set it will adjust the time lag or in advance in unit of hours according to the starting date and the ending date For example if you set the day light saving to be 1 hour When the time passes over the starting time the system time will be increased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over And when the time passes over the ending time the system time will be decreased one hour after one minute at the time since it passed over The switch supports valid configurable daylight saving time is 5 5 step one 11 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 hour The zero for this parameter means it need not have to adjust current time equivalent to in act daylight saving You don t have to set the starting ending date as well If you set daylight saving to be non zero you have to set the starting ending date as well otherwise the daylight saving function will not be activated Time Set Offset Provide the Daylight saving time set offset The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 1 to 1440 minutes default is 60 mins Daylight Savings Type Provide the Daylight savings type selection You can select By Dates or Recurring two type for Daylight saving type From To configure when Daylight saving start date and time the format is YYYY MM DD HH MM To To configure when
193. ive Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values A Figure 3 3 2 1 The LACP Port Configuration 62 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Port LACP Enabled Key 1 oartrnonnrunn O O O O O O O O O O O O O m O O O Ci O O O O m a Save J Reset Parameter description Port The switch port number LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAGs Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 63 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 64 Publica
194. lassified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value 184 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column Conflict Displays QCE status It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releaseing the resource required by the QCE and pressing Refresh button Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Resolve Conflict Click it to resolve the conflict issue Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the QCL information by manual 185 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 15 12 Storm Control The section allows user to configure the Storm control for the switch There is a unicast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch Web Interface To configure the Storm Control Configuration parameters in the w
195. le protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in iii Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 FCC Caution CE mark Warning A A accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications To assure continued compliance example use only shielded interface cables when connection to computer or peripheral devices Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the Following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This is a Class A device In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures NoTE Emphasizes important information or calls your attention to related features or instructions WARNING Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause personal injury CAUTION Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause loss of data or damage the system or equipment iv Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3
196. learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Boot the switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the switch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap 8 Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken o State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown e Re open Button If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section O NoTE That clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes will be lost e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Port Security information by manual e Buttons S
197. lector 190 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 The value of the port number has to be typed into the text box The value accepted is within the range of 1 65535 But an appropriate port number not used by other protocols need to be configured By default the port s number is 6343 e Time out It is the duration during which the collector receives samples Once it is expired the sampler stops sending the samples It is through the management the value is set before it expires The value accepted is within the range of 0 2147483647 By default it is set to 0 e Datagram Size It is the maximum UDP datagram size to send out the sFlow samples to the receiver The value accepted is within the range of 200 1500 bytes The default is 1400 bytes o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 191 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 17 2 Sampler The section display the sFlow sampler what you set or you can edit it for your requirement That will help user based on a defined sampling rate an average of 1 out of N packets operations is randomly sampled This type of sampling does not provide a 100 accurate result but it does provide a result with quantifiable accuracy Web Interface To configure the sFlow Agent in the web interface 1 Click Configuration sFlow Agent sampler 2 click the to edit the sFlow sampler parameters 3 Scro
198. levels The switch provides user set Account Aggregation Diagnostics EEE GARP GVRP IP IPMC Snooping LACP LLDP LLDP MED MAC Table MRP MVR MVRP Maintenance Mirroring POE Ports Private VLANs QoS SMTP SNMP Security Spanning Tree System Trap Event VCL VLANs Voice VLAN Privilege Levels from 1 to 15 Web Interface To configure Privilege Level in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Account Privilege Level 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Save Figure2 3 2 The Privilege Level configuration 16 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 SS 10 4 e7 a FA oflojliojijojio z 38888 o o o o o 10 o Ki pmr alo iss Fz h o gt ii as os ojo BE ollo i Parameter description Group Name The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them contains more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in details System Contact Name Location Timezone Log Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dotix port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection and IP source guard IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriPHY Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY 17 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Maintenance System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configu
199. lick Save to save the configuration Figure 3 15 2 The QoS Ingress Port Policers Configuration Pon M de Rate Unit Flow Control lt gt oO ON On ER WH O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 5 8 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1010109119109 1911019110109 10190010 Parameter description eo Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers 163 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Enabled To evoke which Port you need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers function Rate To set the Rate limit value for this port the default is 500 Unit To scroll to select what unit of rate includes kbps Mbps fps and kfps The default is kbps Flow Control To evoke to enable or disable flow control on port Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 164 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 15 3 Port Scheduler This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports and the ports belong to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Schedulers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Schedulers 2 Display the QoS Egress Port Schedulers Figure 3 15 3 The QoS Egress Port Schedules Click the
200. ling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VolP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Delete Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that shall be mapped to the specific ports Application Type Intended use of the application types 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signalling than for the voice media This application type shoul
201. link mechanism for upper layer protocols It is the upper sub layer of the Data Link Layer and provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several network protocols IP IPX to coexist within a multipoint network LLC header consists of 1 byte DSAP Destination Service Access Point 1 byte SSAP Source Service Access Point 1 or 2 bytes Control field followed by LLC information LLDP LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP specified in this standard allows stations attached to an IEEE 802 LAN to advertise to other stations attached to the same IEEE 802 LAN the major capabilities provided by the system incorporating that station the management address or addresses of the entity or entities that provide management of those capabilities and the identification of the stations point of attachment to the IEEE 802 LAN required by those management entity or entities The information distributed via this protocol is stored by its recipients in a standard Management Information Base MIB making it possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System NMS using a management protocol such as the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP LLDP MED LLDP MED is an extendsion of IEEE 802 1ab and is defined by the telecommunication industry association TIA 1057 LOC LOC is an acronym for Loss Of Connectivity and is detected by a MEP and is indicating lost connectivity i
202. ll as the examples of the operation for web based interface The 065 7861POE series the next generation Web managed switches from Signamax is a portfolio of affordable managed switches that provides a reliable infrastructure for your business network These switches deliver more intelligent features you need to improve the availability of your critical business applications protect your sensitive information and optimize your network bandwidth to deliver information and applications more effectively It provides the ideal combination of affordability and capabilities for entry level networking includes small business or enterprise application and helps you create a more efficient better connected workforce 065 7861POE Web Managed Switches provide 26 ports in a single device the specification is highlighted as follows e 12 features provide better manageability security QoS and performance e High port count design with all Gigabit Ethernet ports e Support guest VLAN voice VLAN Port based tag based and Protocol based VLANs Support 802 3az Energy Efficient Ethernet standard Support 8K MAC table Support IPv6 IPv4 Dual stack Support s Flow Support Easy Configuration Port for easy implement the IP Phone IP Camera or Wireless environment Overview of this user s manual Chapter 1 Operation of Web based Management Chapter 2 System Configuration Chapter 3 Configuration Chapter 4 Security Chapter 5 Main
203. ll to Sample Type to choice with None Tx Rx or All 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 17 2 The sFlow sampler Configuration Ports DOI E El i E Parameter description eo sFlow Ports 192 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 List of the port numbers on which sFlow is configured sFlow Instance Configured sFlow instance for the port number Sampler Type Configured sampler type on the port and could be any of the types None Rx Tx or All You can scroll to choice one for your sampler type By default The value is None Sampling Rate Configured sampling rate on the ports Max Hdr Size Configured size of the header of the sampled frame Polling Interval Configured polling interval for the counter sampling Buttons e Edits the Data source sampler configuration Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to cancel to clear up what your setting Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the sFlow Sampler information by manual 193 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 18 Loop Protection The loop Protection is used to detect th
204. low collector IP Address Port Number for each sFlow Collector 3 17 1 Collector The Current field displays the currently configured sFlow Collector The Configured field displays the new Collector Configuration Web Interface To configure the sFlow Agent in the web interface 1 Click Configuration sFlow Agent Collector 2 Set the parameters 3 Scroll to IP Type to choice with IPv4 or IPv6 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 17 1 The sFlow Collector Configuration Configured Current Receiver Id 1 1 IP Type IPv4 IP Address 0000 0 0 00 Port mot Datagram Size Save Reset Parameter description e Receiver Id The Receiver ID input fields allow the user to select the receiver ID Indicates the ID of this particular sFlow Receiver Currently one ID is supported as one collector is supported e IP Type A drop down list to select the type of IP of Collector is displayed By default IPv4 is the type of Collector IP type You could using IPv4 or IPv6 e IP Address The address of a reachable IP is to be entered into the text box This IP is used to monitor the sFlow samples sent by sFlow Agent our switch By default The IP is set to 0 0 0 0 and a new entry has to be added to it eo Port A port to listen to the sFlow Agent has to be configured for the Col
205. lowing Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class For example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class Il also support all aspects of TIA 1057 120 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class l and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class II and Generic Endpoints Class m LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class I The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management m LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class Il definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previou
206. lso represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 22 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 5 Syslog The Syslog is a standard for logging program messages lt allows separation of the software that generates messages from the system that stores them and the software that reports and analyzes them lt can be used as well a generalized informational analysis and debugging messages It is supported by a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms 2 5 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure the system log and provide a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms Web Interface To configure Syslog configuration in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Syslog 2 Specify the syslog parameters includes IP Address of Syslog server and Port number 3 Evoke the Sylog to enable it 4 Click Save Figure2 5 1 The System Log configuration System Log Configuration Server Mode Disabled Server Address 1 Server Address 2 Syslog Level Info A Parameter description e Server Mode Indicates the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will send out to syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will
207. m for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another It is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET TFTP UDP TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provide directory service and security features UDP is an acronym for Use
208. m for refresh the system log or clear them by manual others for next up page or entry 24 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 5 3 Detailed Log This section describes that display the detailed log information of the switch Web Interface To display the detailed log configuration in the web interface 1 Click Syslog Detailed Log 2 Display the log information Figure2 5 3 The Detailed System Log Information Parameter description o ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry Message The detailed message of the system log entry Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the system log or clear them by manual others for next up page or entry 25 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 6 SNMP Any Network Management System NMS running the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP can manage the Managed devices equipped with SNMP agent provided that the Management Information Base MIB is installed correctly on the managed devices The SNMP is a protocol that is used to govern the transfer of information between SNMP manager and agent and traverses the Object Identity OID of the management Information Base MIB described in the form of SMI syntax SNMP agent is running on the switch to response the request issued by SNMP manager Basically it is passive except issuing the trap information The switch supports a switch to turn on or off the SNMP agent If you set the field
209. mation Web Interface To display the STP Bridges status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree STP Bridges 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 6 The STP Bridges status CI Refresh 7 Root Topology Topology E Eae Port Cost Flag Change Last CIST 80 00 00 40 C7 74 00 C9 80 00 00 40 C7 74 00 C9 0 Steady Parameter description eo MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance e RootID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge it is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag of this Bridge instance Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the STP Bridges status information by manual 79 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 4 7 Port Status After you complete the STP configuration the you could to ask the switch display the STP Port Status The Section provides you
210. minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is 0 to 255 e System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCIT characters from 32 to 126 9 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 1 3 CPU Load This page displays the CPU load using an SVG graph The load is measured as averaged over the last 100ms 1sec and 10 seconds intervals The last 120 samples are graphed and the last numbers are displayed as text as well In order to display the SVG graph your browser must support the SVG format Consult the SVG Wiki for more information on browser support Specifically at the time of writing Microsoft Internet Explorer will need to have a plugin installed to support SVG Web interface To configure System Information in the web interface 1 Click System System Information CPU Load 2 Display the CPU Load on the screen 3 Click Auto refresh Figure 2 1 3 CPU Load 100ms 0 1sec 3 10sec 3 all numbers running average Parameter description e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically i Note The under from and to was displayed what you set on the From and To field informatio
211. mit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page MAC Count Current Limit The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash Indicates the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked on the port If no user modules are enabled on the port a dash will be shown Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Port Security Switch Status information by manual 249 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 7 3 Port Status This section shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this n
212. multicast addresses and any node that listens to such an address will receive the traffic sent to that address Application software running on the source and destination systems cooperates to determine what multicast address to use Note that this is a function of the application software not of MLD When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast traffic If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address it forwards that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address It drops that traffic for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts MLD snooping enabled Listener MLD host a uy O sr Source SE Li fo Listener MLD host 3 6 1 Basic Configuration The section will let you understand how to configure the MLD Snooping basic configuration and the parameters Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping Basic Configuration 2 Evoke to enable or disable the Global configuration parameters Evoke the port to join Router port and Fast Leave 3 Scroll to select the Throttling mode with unlimited or 1 to 10 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 6 1 The MLD Snooping Basic Configuration 94 Publication date Oct 2012
213. n 10 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 2 Time This page configures the switch Time Time configure is including Time Configuration and NTP Configuration 2 2 1 Manual The switch provides manual and automatic ways to set the system time via NTP Manual setting is simple and you just input Year Month Day Hour Minute and Second within the valid value range indicated in each item Web To 1 2 3 Interface configure Time in the web interface Click Time Manual Specify the Time parameter in manual parameters Click Save Figure 2 2 1 The time configuration Time Configuration Use Local Settings Clock Source RE Use NTP Server Local Time 2011 01 01 00 10 20 YYYY MM DD HH MM SS Time Zone Offset o min Daylight Savings Enable Time Set Offset min Range 1 1440 Default 60 Daylight Savings By dates Type Recurring From _ YYYY MM DD HH MM To YYYY MM DD HH MM From Day Week Month Time HH MM To Day Week Month Time HH MM Parameter description o Clock Source To select what clock source is used for the 065 7861POE You can select Use Local Settings or Use NTP Server for the 065 7861POE time clock source o Local Time Show the current time of the system e Time Zone Offset 0 D Provide the time zone offset relative to UTC GMT The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range
214. n It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 1 7 The EEE Configuration 49 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 a oo 1 O tn EWN A o Q00000000000000000000000e oo00000000000000000000000 o000000000000000000000000a OOOODOOOOOOOOO0O0000000000e QOOOQOOOOOOOO0O0000000000 QOOOQOOOOOOOOOOOOO00O00000e O O O O ia id a CI O O O O O g00000000000000000000000 Dpoo0oDo0o00 00d 0 0000000000000 Parameter description e EEE Port Configuration The EEE port settings relate to the currently selected as reflected by the page header eo Port The switch port number of the logical EEE port e EEE Enabled Controls whether EEE is enabled for this switch port e EEE Urgent Queues Queues set will activate transmission of frames as soon as any data is available Otherwise the queue will postpone the transmission until 3000 bytes are ready to be transmitted e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 50 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 2 ACL The 065 7861POE switch access control list ACL is probably the most commonly used object in the IOS It is used for packet filtering but also for selecting types of traffic to be analyzed forwarded or influenced in some way The ACLs are divided into EtherTypes IPv4 ARP protocol
215. n and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 273 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 ICMP stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions IEEE 802 1X IGMP IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP ho
216. n the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked on a given port the swit
217. n the network Can be used as a switch criteria by EPS M MAC Table 275 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 MEP MD5 Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MEP is an acronym for Maintenance Entity Endpoint and is an endpoint in a Maintenance Entity Group ITU T Y 1731 MD5 is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Mirroring MLD MVR NAS For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror fr
218. nd these devices form a reachability tree that is a subset of an active topology GARP defines the architecture rules of operation state machines and variables for the registration and de registration of attribute values A GARP participation in a switch or an end station consists of a GARP application component and a GARP Information Declaration GID component associated with each port or the switch The propagation of information between GARP participants for the same application in a bridge is carried out by the GARP Information Propagation GIP component Protocol exchanges take place between GARP participants by means of LLC Type 1 services using the group MAC address and PDU format defined for the GARP application concerned 3 13 1 Configuration This page allows you to configure the basic GARP Configuration settings for all switch ports The settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure GARP Port Configuration in the web interface 1 Click GARP configures 2 Specify GARP Configuration Parameters 3 Click Save Figure 3 13 1 The GARP Port Configuration SSS Applicantion Attribute Type GARP Applicant 10000 o0 E i UT a i ill i AL Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 n 12 13 4 15 16 ren nl 19 20 21 2 23
219. nds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Port Security Port Status information by manual 250 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 8 Access Management This section shows you to configure access management table of the Switch including HTTP HTTPS SNMP and TELNET SSH You can manage the Switch over an Ethernet LAN or over the Internet 4 8 1 Configuration This section shows you how to configure access management table of the Switch The maximum entry number is 16 If the application s type match any one of the access management entries it will allow access to the switch Web Interface 2 3 4 5 To configure a Access Management Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of Access Management Configuration Click Add new entry Specify the Start IP Address End IP Address Checked Access Management method HTTP HTTPS SNMP and TELNET SSH in the entry Click Save Figure 4 8 1 The Access Management Configuration Mode Dsabes y Delete Start IP Address End IP Address HTTP HTTPS SNMP TEL
220. nfiguration Port Isolation Configuration Port Number Parameter description e Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port By default port isolation is disabled on all ports o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 143 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 11 6 MAC based VLAN MAC address based VLAN decides the VLAN for forwarding an untagged frame based on the source MAC address of the frame A most common way of grouping VLAN members is by port hence the name port based VLAN Typically the device adds the same VLAN tag to untagged packets that are received through the same port Later on these packets can be forwarded in the same VLAN Port based VLAN is easy to configure and applies to networks where the locations of terminal devices are relatively fixed As mobile office and wireless network access gain more popularity the ports that terminal devices use to access the networks are very often non fixed A device may access a network through Port A this time but through Port B the next time If Port A and Port B belong to different VLANs the device will be assigned to a different VLAN the next time it accesses the network As a result it will not be able to use the resources in the old VLAN On
221. nformation This page displays the active Slave Switch information Web Interface To display the active slave information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Single IP and information 2 Evoke the Auto refresh or click to refresh the Single IP status by Manual Figure 3 19 2 The Loop Protection Status Single IP Information Index Model Name MAC Address No Single IP information found Parameter description e Index The ID of the acive Slave Switch e Model Name Displays the model name of the Slave Switch e MAC Address Displays the Ethernet MAC address of the Slave Switch e Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Updates the Single IP information 199 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 20 Easy Port Easy Port provides a convenient way to save and share common configurations You can use it to enable features and settings based on the location of a switch in the network and for mass configuration deployments across the network You could easy to implement included Voice IP phone Wireless Access Point and IP Camera etc Others you can leverage configuration to run a converged voice video and data network considering quality of service QoS bandwidth latency and high performance Web Interface To configure the Easy Port in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Easy Port 2 Set the parameters 3 Scroll to Role for what kin
222. ng on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signalling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy Tag Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID 118 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 VLAN ID VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of 0 represents use of the default priorit
223. nied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration Security AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the The switch will ignore new frames coming from the client 226 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled on all ports RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classifie
224. nk This Router is called the Querier Enable the MLD Querier in the VLAN e Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of MLD operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is MLD Auto Forced MLDv1 Forced MLDv2 default compatibility value is MLD Auto o Rv Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 eo QI Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds e QRI Query Response Interval The Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is O to 97 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Listener Query Interval The Last Listener Query Interval is the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address Specific Queries sent in response to Version 1 Multicast Listener Done messages It is also the Maximum Response Delay used to calculate the Maximum Response Code inserted into Multicast Address and Source Specific Query messages The
225. nnected to the supplicant Gi NOTE Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1 X In Single 802 1X at 228 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3
226. nters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached VLAN ID This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module o State The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As 236 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 long as the backend server hasn t successfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for one or the other reason the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds o Last Authentication Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the NAS Statistics by manual Others you can click clear to clean up all entries 237 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 6 AAA This section shows you to use an AAA Authentication Authorization Accounting server to provide access control to your network The AAA server can be a TACACS or RADIUS server to create and manage objects that contain settings for using AAA servers 4 6 1 Configuration This section describes how to config
227. nym for Drop Eligible Indicator It is a 1 bit field in the VLAN tag Actual PCP is Pri column in Vlan tag packet DEI is cfi column PCP value from 0 7 it can be used for priority definition DEI value is O or 1 it is settable map to DP value is O or 1 When ingress Qos class value is the same then through DP level value to define the priority DP value larger will be dropped first ex From Port 1 input 1G Pkts Egress Port 7 Rate be set with 500M Port 1 Pkts will includes two kinds packet a PCP amp DEI 00 via configured map to Qos class amp DP level 1 0 b PCP amp DEI 01 via configured map to Qos class amp DP level 1 1 Result will find a Packet all past and b packets all drop 161 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 162 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 15 2 Port Policing This section provides an overview of f QoS Ingress Port Policers for all switch ports The Port Policing is useful in constraining traffic flows and marking frames above specific rates Policing is primarily useful for data flows and voice or video flows because voice and video usually maintains a steady rate of traffic Web Interface To display the QoS Port Schedulers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Policing 2 Evoke which port need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers and type the Rate limit condition Scroll to select the Rate limit Unit with kbps Mbps fps and kfps C
228. o CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled Oo TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 e Advertising Duration The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive an SSDP advertisement message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the duration it will think that the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400 o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 206 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 207 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Chapter 4 Security This chapter describes all of the switch security configuration tasks to enhance the security of local network including IP Source Guard ARP Inspection DHCP Snooping AAA and etc 4 1 IP Source Guard The section describes to configure the IP Source Guard detail parameters of the switch You could use the IP Source Guard configure to enable or disa
229. o create a new trap account please check lt No number gt button and enter the trap information then check lt Apply gt Max Group Number 6 Web Interface To configure SNMP Trap setting 1 Click SNMP Trap 2 Display the SNMP Trap Hosts information table 3 Choice a entry to display and modify the detail parameters or click delete button to delete the trap hosts entry Figure 2 6 7 The SNMP Trap Host Configuration gt Server UDP Community Security Severity Security Authentication Privacy perete Nol Watson aie Bot Name Level Level Protocol Protocol Parameters description e Delete Check lt Delete gt entry then check lt Save gt button the entry will be delete Trap Version You may choose vi v2c or v3 trap eo Server IP To assign the SNMP Host IP address e UDP Port To assign Port number Default 162 e Community Security Name 37 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 The length of Community Security Name string is restricted to 1 32 Security Level Indicates what kind of message will send to Security Level Possible modes are Info Send information warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors Security Level There are three kinds of choices NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy Authentication Protocol You can choose
230. o illa 85 3 5 3 POI Group Ela ec ete EN 87 325 4 SIALUS A eee et aaa aves th Paes Seas odie Ge at stad ne hee oe eee ante 89 9 5 5 Group Infermation e E 91 3 5 6 IPV4 SSM information seine 92 3 6 MLD SNOOPING cc sinc atest dd io Geen ce 94 3 6 1 Basic Configuration jaa 94 3 6 2 VLAN COnliQuration oia aora riada 97 3 6 3 Port Group FINGHING sici n 99 IIA es tee ele ee Me A 2 ooh ee a esa es Nine Lee 100 3 6 5 Group Information e ads 102 3 6 6 IPv6 SSM Information sise 104 IMM Risa A A dusty dan E E E 105 9 71 CONQUE a 105 3 7 2 Groups Information ie rnb din miel ee ne ee 107 3 7 Bi SIAUSUCS 81 rm mette an en maire es nes ni Nat rene dent E bandied detees 108 3g LLDP iure a SL ART i 109 9 8 1 LLDP CONTQUIATION e las 109 3 8 2 LLDPN IQNDOUIS iii A ai a 112 3 8 3 LLDP MED Configuration seen 114 3 8 4 LLDP MED N IQNDOUIS uc it ia aiii ais 120 B 8 5 EN 123 3 8 6 Port Statistics 0 iaa 125 BO POE ad 127 3 91 Configuration ste a ote aiden alin ea ate ites 127 879 2 Status kiss dhe O ee ea age 129 3 10 FILTERING DATA BASE coil etnia et pia bd 130 3 TOM CONMMGULALION iva ren ii te a AE 130 IA A A reeder rea e eaea eri rE eee EE E Aaaa oiie 132 SAT VEAN ista e elira e Ee raed laa 134 3 11 11 VLAN Memberships T a e a ped terete a E E E E url E EESE 134 IMP a it E E ET 136 J 11 8 SWiCh Statys 01 Be De ee A AA O Steg IA O 138 ATA Port AU aa 139 9 11 5 Private VEANS ocacion lcd ceca Onde males ects 141 3 11 5 1 Private VLANs Membersh
231. ociated with that port is incremented See the Web page help text for each specific port property ACL Rate Limiters Under this page you can configure the rate limiters There can be 15 different rate limiters each ranging from 1 1024K packets per seconds Under Ports and Access Control List web pages you can assign a Rate Limiter ID to the ACE s or ingress port s AES is an acronym for Advanced Encryption Standard The encryption key protocol is applied in 802 1i standard to improve WLAN security It is an encryption standard by the U S government which will replace DES and 3DES AES has a fixed block size of 128 bits and a key size of 128 192 or 256 bits APS is an acronym for Automatic Protection Switching This protocol is used to secure that switching is done bidirectional in the two ends of a protection group as defined in G 8031 Aggregation Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system ARP Inspe
232. of QoS class and DP level Tag Remarking Mode To scroll to select the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values 171 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to cancel the changes 172 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 15 6 Port DSCP The section will teach user to set the QoS Port DSCP configuration that was allowed you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports Others the settings relate to the currently selected unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the QoS Port DSCP parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port DSCP 2 Evoke to enable or disable the Ingress Translate and Scroll the Classify Parameter configuration 3 Scroll to select Egress Rewrite parameters 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 15 6 The QoS Port DSCP Configuration Ingress Egress Translate Classify Rewrite lt gt EIE Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable hal Disable Disable Disable Disable x Disable Disabl
233. of general switch functions the Internet Protocol IP and Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The following conventions are used throughout this manual to show information See the Customer Support Warranty card included with the product A copy of the specific warranty terms applicable to your Signamax products and replacement parts can be obtained from your Signamax Sales and Service Office authorized dealer Signamax Inc does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and marks no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Signamax disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Signamax Signamax assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual Signamax makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the righter to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the CE FCC remove Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonab
234. of up to 32 switches and not limited to specific models distance barriers specialized cables stacking method Each Single IP group consists of one Master Switch and up to 32 Slave Switches The Master Switch is used to be an agent to manage all switches in the same group The Slave Switch is a switch which wants to join a single IP group and it could be accessed from the Master Switch 3 19 1 Configuration The section describes how to setting the single IP group in this web interface Web Interface To configure the Single IP in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Single IP 2 Choice what mode of the switch is 3 Giving the group name 4 Click the apply to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 19 1 The Single IP Configuration Single IP Configuration Mode Master Group Name VirtualStack Parameter description e Mode Possible modes are Disable Disable operation of Single IP Management Master Enable Single IP Management and to be a Master Switch Slave Enable Single IP Management and to be a Slave Switch e Group Name Indicates the name of the Single IP group Maximum length of the Group Name String is 64 e Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 198 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 19 2 I
235. on or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Only full duplex ports can join an aggregation and ports must be in the same speed in each group o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 61 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 3 2 LACP Ports using Link Aggregation Control Protocol according to IEEE 802 3ad specification as their trunking method can choose their unique LACP GrouplD to form a logic trunked port The benefit of using LACP is that a port makes an agreement with its peer port before it becomes a ready member of a trunk group also called aggregator LACP is safer than the other trunking method static trunk 3 3 2 1 Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well An LACP trunk group with more than one ready member ports is a real trunked group An LACP trunk group with only one or less than one ready member ports is not a real trunked group Web Interface To configure the Trunk Aggregation LACP parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP Configuration 2 Evoke to enable or disable the LACP on the port of the switch Scroll the Key parameter with Auto or Specific Default is Auto 3 Scroll the Role with Active or Passive Default is Act
236. on of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs PING6 server 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 3 time 0ms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad 266 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 5 5 2 Ping6 This section allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues Web Interface To configure an ICMPv6 PING Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify ICMPv6 PING IP Address 2 Specify ICMPv6 PING Size 3 Click Start Figure 5 5 2 The ICMPv6 Ping IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ping Size 64 Parameter description e IP Address The destination IP Address with IPv6 eo Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes eo Start Click the Start button then the switch will start to ping the device using ICMPv6 packet size what set on the switch After you press 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs PING server 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 0
237. ooooooooo c0co0o0o0o0o0o0o0o0o0o0o00000000o0o0o0o0o00o c0cooco0o0o0o0000o00o0o0o00o00o00o0o0o0o0o00o SS000000S000000000000000 SS060000000S000600000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description Global Counters e Neighbour entries were last changed at It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added It also shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected e Total Neighbours Entries Added Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot e Total Neighbours Entries Deleted Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot e Total Neighbours Entries Dropped Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the entry table being full e Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring 125 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Local Counters The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information e Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted e Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port e Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error Frames Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded Thi
238. ords represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol tu is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 eo Buttons These buttons are displayed on the NTP page Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 13 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 3 Account In this function only administrator can create modify or delete the username and password Administrator can modify other guest identities password without confirming the password but it is necessary to modify the administrator equivalent identity Guest equivalent identity can modify his password only Please note that you must confirm administrator guest identity in the field of Authorization in advance before configuring the username and password Only one administrator is allowed to exist and unable to be deleted In addition up to 4 guest accounts can be created 2 3 1 Users This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser Web Interface To configure Account in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Account Users 2 Cli
239. ort FrameType SMAC DMAC VID PCP DEI Port Members 12083 01471499 4461 470 11811490 0207 E Miu Miu ww Parameter description e QCEF Indicates the index of QCE eo Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames 180 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 eo SMAC Displays the OUI field of Source MAC address e first three octet byte of MAC address e DMAC Specify the type of Destination MAC addresses for incoming frame Possible values are Any All types of Destination MAC addresses are allowed Unicast Only Unicast MAC addresses are allowed Multicast Only Multicast MAC addresses are allowed Broadcast Only Broadcast MAC addresses are allowedd The default value is Any o VID Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs VID can be in the range 1 4095 or Any e Conflict Displays QCE status It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releaseing the resource r
240. ort configuration 5 Click the save to save the setting 6 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 5 The MSTI Port Configuration Select N 77 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description o Port The switch port number of the corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favour of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 eo Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 78 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 4 6 Bridge Status After you complete the MSTI Port configuration that you could to ask the switch display the Bridge Status The Section provides a status overview of all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following infor
241. other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be etype 0x0600 0xffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff e Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 O NOTE Special character and underscore _ are not allowed e Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table Frame Type Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Protocol Group Mapping information by manual 148 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 11 7 2 Group to VLAN This section allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the selected switch Web Interface To Display Group Name to VLAN mapping table configured in the web interface 1 Click Group Name VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the Group Name and VLAN ID 3 Click Save Figure 3 11 7 2 The Group Name of VLAN Mapping Table Port Members Delete Group Name VLAN ID nag naag Bof Fefrfufisfis 47 10Jt9 20 21 22 20 24 25 26
242. others such as defined by TIA or NENA e Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 117 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 6 Control Signal
243. out a secure connection User name admin v Password C Remember my password i Note If you need to configuration the function or parameter then you can refer the detail in the User Guide Or you could access to the Switch and click the help under the web GUI and the switch will pop up the simple help content to teach you how to set the parameters 2 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 065 7861POE web help function GEPoESM ESW26K Auto Logout Logou Help TI Information System Information Help Windows Internet Ex gt X lt le http 192 168 20 22 help help_sys htm ES i x Ssa ED pr x B Sy Favorites a 3 KA Suggested sites MT Free Hotmail 7 O a Page gt Safety Tools M System Information Help The switch system information is provided here The system contact configured in Configuration System Information System Contact The system name configured in Configuration System Information System Name The system location configured in Configuration System Information System Location The MAC Address ofthis switch The Chip ID ofthis switch 3 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 CONNECTING NETWORK DEVICES TWISTED PAIR DEVICES CABLING GUIDELINES The switch is designed to be connected to 10 100 or 1000Mbps network cards in PCs and servers as well as to other switches and hub
244. plicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized o Restart Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is in progress e Buttons Save Click to save changes 231 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the NAS Configuration by manual 232 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 5 2 Switch Status The s
245. pporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signalling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signalling than for the video media Policy Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the device Can be either Defined or Unknown Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown Defined The network policy is defined TAG TAG is indicative of whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged or Untagged Untagged The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of O Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of the eight priority levels 0 throug
246. r concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier The section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities 2 Scroll the Priority maximum is 240 Default is 128 3 Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 3 The MSTI Configuration MSTI Priority Configuration ENE 3 sis sis sls EIEI EI EA EA EA NES oO oo Parameter description e MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active eo Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 74 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 4 4 CIST Ports When you implement an Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance You need to configure the CIST Ports The section describes it allows the user to inspect the to inspect the current STP
247. r 500 kbps w mode with wighted then the screen will change as bra Is the figure kbps 500 kbps v a EY kbps 500 kbps 500 kbps Y 500 kbps Py 500 kbps iv Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers Shapers Qn Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps Shapers Port Shows disabled or actual port shaper rate e g 800 Mbps Scheduler Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth Queue Scheduler Weight 169 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This p
248. r Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP User Priority User Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame It is also known as PCP 281 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 VLAN VLAN Virtual LAN A method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN I
249. r services By targeting at network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation DSCP Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes 272 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 E EEE EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802 3az EPS EPS is an abbreviation for Ethernet Protection Switching defined in ITU T G 8031 Ethernet Type Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard lt is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame F FTP FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading It also provides directory service and security features Fast Leave Multicast snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group
250. ral network protocols IP IPX Decnet and Appletalk to coexist within a multipoint network and to be transported over the same network media and can also provide flow control and automatic repeat request ARQ error management mechanisms SNAP The Subnetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier spaces It is used with IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 4 IEEE 802 5 IEEE 802 11 and other IEEE 802 physical network layers as well as with non IEEE 802 physical network layers such as FDDI that use 802 2 LLC 3 11 7 1 Protocol to Group This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the selected switch Web Interface To configure Protocol based VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click Protocol based VLAN configuration and add a new entry 2 Specify the Ethernet LLC SNAP Protocol and Group Name 3 Click Save Figure 3 11 7 1 The Protocol to Group Mapping Table Delete Frame Type Value Group Name No Group entry found Save Jf Reset Delete Frame Type Value Delete Ethemet M Etype 0x 0800 Add new entry Parameter description e D
251. ration The condition is also cleared by a system reboot Port Error Recovery Timeout The time to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 71 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 4 2 MSTI Mapping When you implement an Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped Due to the reason that you need to set the list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it This section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping 2 Specify the configuration identification parameters in the field Specify the VLANs Mapped blank field 3 Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 4 2 The MSTI Configuration Configu
252. ration Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance e Privilege Levels Every group has an authorization Privilege level for the following sub groups configuration read only configuration execute read write status statistics read only status statistics read write e g for clearing of statistics User Privilege should be same or greater than the authorization Privilege level to have the access to that group 18 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 4 IP IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across an internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPV6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol address
253. re disabled e Aging Enabled If checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period e Aging Period If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns w
254. ription a A A EE A 41 32123 Tafe QVERVIGQW e A td daa 42 3 1 4 Detalled StAlISIICS o A e RE DE Cia ee 44 IDO Stati SOS A os Nee pe be cu SP NE osc Gt nt sala it 46 36 SEP NO MATO AE AO REE AEDE A AEE A AEA EAN EN ee Le 47 EERTE ml A EPE ENA EET i E EE EEEE E E A o 49 RAGE E EE E bende A ETA EE E E E dr 51 BD o EA E E EEE E NEIE ETE AR A E E Sead sell 51 SS gt UA A E A E A A E eae E A AE 53 3 2 3 ACCESS GOMMONLISK a A AE 55 E OS ON 58 B SAGGREGATION cti e a A E A a ts nal Eds ed 60 ISSO TUN IN DAR O AU 4 60 AS A E A E E E EEE E be Mr A E Se AR Lien EE 60 EE A AA NE Re RAT NE rt E E ak Ne LR A na ARE 62 3 3 2 1 Config rati onsen er A aaa 62 3 39 22 System Stal S cai talar 65 3 32 39 E adol g EELEE U iii E TE 66 3 3 2 4 Por BESE IEI O EEE oe E EEA EE Ue E E EEE EEA 68 3 4 SPANNING TRE Erdan rea A td E e E ee 69 341 Bridge SOTINOS sen roi T sae eh ie st le Tae ra ane A aa aE aa ia anai 69 2 42 MSTIMAOPpiDO setie ten ent dl aa BAD epee ee eee ab dai ias 72 3 4 3 MISTERIO MOS idos 74 ii Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 4 4 CIST ROMS ts dt id ta ati dd 75 OAS MS Ul PONS E A nn eee ste ii LS ido a 77 324 6 Bridge StaquS 20 it es a ee od A Ea 79 9 4 7 POM Status cai o Tier 80 IAB Port Statisties ie cs sot eae ae aie ee a Date ah ee Scie e 81 3 5 IGMP SNOORING EE he rt a Ragen 83 93 5 1 Basic Configuration scs 25 ice ti eee ioce gel toes tesees bea eaer E aE E EER aE eee eens 83 328 2 VLAN COnfiQuration i
255. rt link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port co
256. rval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled e Port State The current state of the port It can undertake one of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the sup
257. s Set Hold Time Default is 10 seconds Checked RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled Checked RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled Checked Guest VLAN Enabled Specify Guest VLAN ID 11 Specify Max Reauth Count 12 13 Checked Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen Click Save Figure 4 5 1 The Network Access Server Configuration Refresh Mode Disabled Reauthentication Enabled Reauthentication Period 600 seconds EAPOL Timeout 30 seconds Aging Period 300 seconds Hold Time 10 seconds RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled O RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled Guest VLAN Enabled O Guest VLAN ID 1 Max Reauth Count 2 Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen RADIUS Assigned RADIUS Assigned Guest RS PINS QoS Enabled VLAN Enabled VLAN Enabled Port State RE gt a O 4 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 2 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 3 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 4 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 5 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 6 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 7 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 8 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 9 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 40 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 11 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 42 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 13 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 14 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 15 Force Authorized
258. s It may also be connected to remote devices using optional SFP transceivers Each device requires an unshielded twisted pair UTP cable with RJ 45 connectors at both ends Use Category 5 5e or 6 cable for 1000BASE T connections Category 5 or better for 100BASE TX connections The RJ 45 ports on the switch support automatic MDI MDI X pin out configuration so you can use standard straight through twisted pair cables to connect to any other network device PCs servers switches routers or hubs See Appendix B for further information on cabling A CAUTION Do not plug a phone jack connector into an RJ 45 port This will damage the switch Use only twisted pair cables with RJ 45 connectors that conform to FCC standards CONNECTING TO PCS SERVERS HUBS AND SWITCHES Step 1 Attach one end of a twisted pair cable segment to the device s RJ 45 connector Figure 16 Making Twisted Pair Connections 4 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Step2 If the device is a network card and the switch is in the wiring closet attach the other end of the cable segment to a modular wall outlet that is connected to the wiring closet See the section Network Wiring Connections Otherwise attach the other end to an available port on the switch Make sure each twisted pair cable does not exceed 100 meters 328 ft in length OTE Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub
259. s Generic Endpoint Class Class and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class 1 and Media Endpoint Class Il classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management e LLDP MED Capabilities LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighborhood unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identification Extended Power via MDI PSE Extended Power via MDI PD Inven
260. s defined It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Web Interface To display the QoS Control List Status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS QCL Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Scroll to select the combined static Voice VLAN and conflict 4 To Click the Refresh to refresh an entry of the MVR Statistics Information Figure 3 15 11 The QoS Control List Status Combined M f Resolve Conflict User QCE Frame Type Port Static 2 Any 24 76 10A 10B Class2 Default Default No Static 1 Any 5 10B Class 0 Default Default No Parameter description eo User Indicates the QCL user e QCE Indicates the index of QCE Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed LLC Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames e Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE e Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class C
261. s situation is known as Too Many Neighbours in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port s link is down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out e TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded e TLVs Unrecognized The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value e Org Discarded The number of organizationally received TLVs e Age Outs Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the LLDP Port Statistics information by manual Or press clear to clean up the entries 126 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 9 PoE PoE is an acronym for Power Over Ethernet Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable It could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN access
262. s used for higher layer entities to assist discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbour s IP address Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the LLDP Neighbours information by manual 113 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 8 3 LLDP MED Configuration Media Endpoint Discovery is an enhancement of LLDP known as LLDP MED that provides the following facilities Auto discovery of LAN policies such as VLAN Layer 2 Priority and Differentiated services Diffserv settings enabling plug and play networking Device location discovery to allow creation of location databases and in the case of Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Enhanced 911 services Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet PoE end points Inventory management allowing network administrators to track their network devices and determine their characteristics Signamaxr software and hardware versions serial or asset number This page allows you to configure the LLDP MED This function applies to VoIP devices which support LLDP MED Web Interface To configure LLDP MED 1 Click LLDP MED Configuration 2 Modify Fast start repeat count parameter default is 4 3 Modify Coordinates Location psrameters 4 Fill Civic Address Location parameters 5 Add new policy 6 Click Save
263. sabled E Se Receiver a A O A 7 Disabled Receiver Disabled 8 Disabled m Receiver Disabled 9 E Receiver Disabled 1 C O Dem 12 Disabled Receiver Disabled 13 Disabled Receiver v Disabled 14 Disabled Receiver Disabled 15 Disabiea 4 Receiver Disabled 16 Disabled Receiver i Disabled 47 Disabied Receiver Disabled 18 Disabled Receiver Disabled 15 ES i Receiver ES RS 21 seee A Bebe uo Disabled 22 Disabled Receiver Disabled 23 Disabled Receiver Disabled 24 Disabled Receiver Y Disabled 25 Disabled Receiver Disabled 26 Disabled w Receiver Y Disabled ERRE KK i a K KRR ERK K RIR 105 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description e MVR Mode Enable Disable the Global MVR e VLANID Specify the Multicast VLAN ID e Mode Enable MVR on the port e Type Specify the MVR port type on the port e Immediate Leave Enable the fast leave on the port o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 106 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 7 2 Groups Information The section describes user could display the MVR Groups detail information on the switch Entries
264. sage when 221 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 transferring to DHCP client It only works when DHCP relay operation mode is enabled Disabled Disable DHCP relay information mode operation e Relay Information Policy Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy When DHCP relay information mode operation is enabled if agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay agent information it will enforce the policy And it only works under DHCP if relay information operation mode is enabled Possible policies are Replace Replace the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Keep Keep the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it is received Drop Drop the package when a DHCP message that already contains relay information is received o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 222 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 4 2 Statistics The section describes to show the DHCP Relay Statistics information of the switch The statistics show both of Server and Client packet counters when DHCP Relay mode is enabled Web Interface To configure a DHCP Snooping Statistics Configuration in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 4 2 The DHCP Relay Statistics PC Retesh J cca Transmit Transmit Receive Receive Missing Receive
265. selected switch Web Interface To display the STP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree Port Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 3 4 8 The STP Statistics Transmitted Received Discarded MSTP RSTP STP TCN MSTP RSTP STP TCN Unknown illegal Port Parameter description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port eo RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port e TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the STP Statistics information or clear by manual 81 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 82 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 5 IGMP Snooping The function is used to establish the multicast groups to forward the mult
266. ses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail 279 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 SNAP The SubNetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier SNMP SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture lt enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP SNTP SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer SSID Service Set Identifier is a name used to identify the particular 802 11 wireless LANs to which a user wants to attach A client device will receive broadcast messages from all access points within range advertising their SSIDs and can choose one to connect to based on pre configuration or by displaying a list of
267. smit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit Web Interface To Display the per Port detailed Statistics Overview in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Detailed Port Statistics 2 Scroll the Port Index to select which port you want to show the detailed Port statistics overview 3 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 4 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 3 1 4 The Port Detail Statisitcs Overview Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Rx Packets Rx Octets Rx Unicast Rx Multicast Rx Broadcast Rx Pause Receive Size Counters Rx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Receive Queue Counters 7637 1518566 7183 29 425 0 4761 200 86 2588 2 0 0 Port 1 Y Auto refresh Transmit Total Tx Packets Tx Octets Tx Unicast Tx Multicast Tx Broadcast Tx Pause Transmit Size Counters Tx 64 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes Transmit Queue Counters Refresh Clear 10688 3337459 4974 5714 0 0 72 5380 2866 97 2139 To scroll which port to display the Port statistics with Port 0 Port 1 Receive Total an
268. spection or disable the Global ARP Inspection e Port Mode Configuration Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 214 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 2 2 Static Table The section describes to configure the Static ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch You could use the Static ARP Inspection Table configure to manage the ARP entries Web Interface To configure a Static ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Add new entry 2 Specify the Port VLAN ID IP Address and MAC address in the entry 3 Click Save Figure 4 2 2 The Static ARP Inspection Table Delete Port VLANID MAC Address IP Address Save Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save eo Port The logical port for the settings e VLANID The vlan id for the settings e MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets e IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets e Adding new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table Specify the Port VLAN ID MAC address and IP address for the new entry Click Save e Buttons Save Click to save
269. ss Filtering Frame Type TxTag UVID Conflicts 1 UnAware Disabled All Untag_this 1 1 UnAware Disabled Untag_this 1 UnAware Disabled Untag_this 1 UnAware i Untag_this 4 UnAware i Untag_this 43 UnAware i Untag_this 4 UnAware i Untag_this 1 Untag_this 1 Untag_this 1 Untag_this 1 Untag_this 1 Untag_this 4 i All Untag_this Untag_this 1 Untag_this 1 Untag_this 1 Untag_this 1 Untag_this 1 Untag_this it Untag_this 4 Untag_this 1 Untag_this 1 Untag_this 1 Untag_this 1 Untag_this f Untag_this FSSsssssssssesssssssssssss Parameter description eo Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row eo PVID Shows the VLAN identifier for that port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 Port Type Shows the Port Type Port type can be any of Unaware C port S port Custom S port If Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed C port is Customer Port S port is Service port Custom S port is S port with Custom TPID Ingress Filtering Shows the ingress filtering on a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN the frame is discarded Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port
270. sts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gaming and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses IGMP Querier IMAP IP A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more complex features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across an internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each de
271. t Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the mirror port Ci NOTE For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port Because of this mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only o Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 203 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 22 Trap Event Severity The function is used to set an Alarm trap and get the Event log The Trap Events Configuration function is used to enable the switch to send out the trap information while pre defined trap events occurred Web Interface To configure the Trap Event Severity Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Trap Event Severity Configuration 2 Scroll to select the Group name and Severity Level 3 Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 22 1 The Trap Event Severity Configuration Group Name Severity Level ACL Info i ACL Log Access Mgmt Cold Start Import Export LACP i RIRIK mo x Warning M 5131135 3313 Jiii 2 5 o K nii IRIRE ui re Parameter description e Group
272. t directs the forwarding of IP multicast traffic Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping Port Group Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering 2 Click Add new Filtering Group 3 Scroll the Port to enable the Port Group Filtering Specify the Filtering Groups in the blank field 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 3 The IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering Configuration Delete Port Filtering Groups Add new Filtering Group Parameter description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Port 87 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 To evoke the port enable the IGMP Snooping Port Group Filtering function e Filtering Groups The IP Multicast Group that will be filtered e Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 88 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 5 4 Status After you complete the IGMP Snooping configuration then you could to let the switch display the IGMP Snooping Status The Section provides you to let switch to display the IGMP Snooping detail status Web Interface To display the IGMP Snooping status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IGMP Snooping Status 2 If you wan
273. t to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the IGMP Snooping Status 4 Click Clear to clear the IGMP Snooping Status Figure 3 5 4 The IGMP Snooping Status E Elias A E a A E Emol i a Sas al Ein ea sii a el a bf Satis i pea k pa EEE pois iis Sim pes Parameter description e VLANID The VLAN ID of the entry e Querier Version Working Querier Version currently e Host Version Working Host Version currently e Querier Status Shows the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE e Queries Transmitted The number of Transmitted Queries 89 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Queries Received The number of Received Queries V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The number of Received V2 Reports V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the Status or clear them by manual 90 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 5 5 Group Infermation After you complete to set the IGMP Snooping function then you could let the switch to display the IGMP Snooping Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on th
274. tch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication Last ID The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication QoS Class 233 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the NAS
275. te Oct 2012 Revision A3 Parameter description LLDP Parameters Tx Interval The switch periodically transmits LLDP frames to its neighbours for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted an LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected as reflected by the page header Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port Mode Select LLDP mode Rx only The switch
276. tenance 1 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Initial Configuration Operation of Web based Management This chapter instructs you how to configure and manage the 065 7861POE through the web user interface With this facility you can easily access and monitor through any one port of the switch all the status of the switch including MIBs status each port activity Spanning tree status port aggregation status multicast traffic VLAN and priority status even illegal access record and so on The default values of the 065 7861POE are listed in the table below IP Address 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DST ACE TEWA 192 168 1 254 Username admin Password After the 065 7861POE has finished configuring the IT interface you can browse it For instance type _http 192 168 1 1 in the address row in a browser it will show the following screen and ask you inputting username and password in order to login and access authentication The default username is admin and password is empty For the first time to use please enter the default username and password and then click the lt Login gt button The login process now is completed In this login menu you have to input the complete username and password respectively the 065 7861POE will not give you a shortcut to username automatically This looks inconvenient but safer In the 065 7861POE it supports a simple user man
277. the switch then it provides a Port Status overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP Port Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Port Status Figure 3 3 2 3 The LACP Status Parameter description eo Port The switch port number e LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile it s LACP status is disabled eo Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together e AggrID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs e Partner System ID The partner s System ID MAC address e Partner Port The partner s port number connected to this port 66 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the LACP port status information by manual 67 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 3 2 4 Port Statistics This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it provides a
278. thentication Server and a number of columns which are o A The TACACS Authentication Server number for which the configuration below applies 240 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Enabled Enable the TACACS Authentication Server by checking this box IP Address Hostname The IP address or hostname of the TACACS Authentication Server IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation Port The TCP port to use on the TACACS Authentication Server If the port is set to O zero the default port 49 is used on the TACACS Authentication Server Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the TACACS Authentication Server and the switch Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 241 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 6 2 Radius Overview This section shows you an overview of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting servers status to ensure the function is workable Web Interface To configure a RADIUS Overview Configuration in the web interface 1 Checked Auto refresh Figure 4 6 2 The RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview CIN Retesh IP Address 0 0 0 0 1812 0 0 0 0 1812 0 0 0 0 1812 0 0 0 0 1812 0 0 0 0 1812 IP Address 0 0 0 0 1813 0 0 0 0 1813 0 0 0 0 1813 0 0 0 0 1813 0 0 0 0 1813 Parameter description o The RADIUS server number Click to navigat
279. tialized e AutoEdge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not o Restricted Role If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also known as Root Guard Oo Restricted TCN If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently e BPDU Guard If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon recei
280. tion Configured Current Auto Configuration O 192 168 1 1 Link Local Address fe80 240 c7ftfe74 d1 Prefix 196 96 Gateway Address 192 168 1 1 Parameter description e Auto Configuration Enable IPV6 auto configuration by checking this box If fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer e Address Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol tu is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 o Prefix Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 to 128 e Router Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol tu is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can 21 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 a
281. tion You can bundle more than one port with the same speed full duplex and the same MAC to be a single logical port thus the logical port aggregates the bandwidth of these ports This means you can apply your current Ethernet equipment s to build the bandwidth aggregation For example if there are three Fast Ethernet ports aggregated in a logical port then this logical port has bandwidth three times as high as a single Fast Ethernet port has 3 3 1 Static Trunk The Aggregation Configuration is used to configure the settings of Link Aggregation You can bundle more than one port with the same speed full duplex and the same MAC to be a single logical port thus the logical port aggregates the bandwidth of these ports This means you can apply your current Ethernet equipment s to build the bandwidth aggregation 3 3 1 1 Static Trunk Ports using Static Trunk as their trunk method can choose their unique Static GrouplD to form a logic trunked port The benefit of using Static Trunk method is that a port can immediately become a member of a trunk group without any handshaking with its peer port This is also a disadvantage because the peer ports of your static trunk group may not know that they should be aggregate together to form a logic trunked port Using Static Trunk on both end of a link is strongly recommended Please also note that low speed links will stay in not ready state when using static trunk to aggregate with high spe
282. tion date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 3 2 2 System Status This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it provides a status overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP System status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration LACP System Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP System Status Figure 3 3 2 2 The LACP System Status O retest Partner Partner Last Local AggrID SystemiD Key Changed Ports T No ports enabled or no existing partners Parameter description e AggrID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id e Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner e Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID e Last changed The time since this aggregation changed e Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch The format is Switch ID Port e Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically e Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the LACP System status information by manual 65 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 3 2 3 Port Status This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on
283. to reset the Switch configuration to Factory Defaults Any configuration files or scripts will recover to factory default values Web Interface To configure a Factory Defaults Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Factory Defaults 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 1 The Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Parameter description e Buttons Yes Click to Yes button to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click to to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration 5 3 2 Save Start This section describes how to save the Switch Start configuration Any current configuration files will be saved as XML format Web Interface To configure a Save Start Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Save Start 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 2 The Save Start configuration Are you sure to save the current setting as Start Configuration Parameter description 261 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 o Buttons Save Click the Save button to save current setting as Start Configuration 5 3 3 Save User This section describes how to save users information Any current configuration files will be saved as XML format Web Interface To configure a Save User Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Save User 2 Click Yes Figure 5 3 3 The Save as Backup Configuration Are you sure to save the current setting
284. tory ona A WwW N 7 Reserved e Application Type Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The possible application types are shown below 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signalling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signalling than for the voice media 3 Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting 121 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signalling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media 5 Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops 6 Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications su
285. tring length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 30 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 2 6 4 Groups The function is used to configure SNMPv3 group The Entry index key are Security Model and Security Name To create a new group account please check lt Add new group gt button and enter the group information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number v1 2 v2 2 v3 10 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Groups in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Groups 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Save Figure 2 6 4 The SNMP Groups Configuration Delete Security Model Security Name Group Name usm default user Add new group Save CL i E Delete Security Model Security Name Group Name M vf Adsnew group Save Parameter description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are vi Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM e Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1
286. ts received and transmitted Rx and Tx Inform The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted e Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned The number of lease unassigned option 53 with value 11 packets received and 219 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Unknown The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Active The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and transmitted Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh Clear You can click them for refresh the DHCP Snooping Port Statistics by manual others for clear to clean up the entries 220 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 4 4 DHCP Relay The section describes how to forward DHCP requests to another specific DHCP servers via DHCP relay The DHCP servers may be on another network 4 4 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure DHCP Relay setting including Relay Mode Enabled and Disabled Relay Server IP setting Relay Information Mode Enabled and Disabled Relay Information Mode Policy Replace Keep and Drop Web Interface To configure a DHCP Relay in the web interface 4 2 3 4 5 Sele
287. ulate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled e Destination MAC Address The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled e IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled e TCP UDP Port Number The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Aggregation Group Configuration e Locality Indicates the aggregation group type This field is only valid for switches Global The group members may reside on different units The device supports two 8 port global aggregations Local The group members reside on the same unit Each local aggregation may consist of up to 16 members e Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port o Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregati
288. update web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen Figure 3 8 2 The LLDP Neighbours information LA Refresh Local Port ChassisID Remote PortID System Name Port Description System Capabilities System Description Management Address NO LLDP neighbour information found G NOTE If your network without any device supports LLDP then the table will show No LLDP neighbour information found Parameter description e Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbour s LLDP frames e Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbour port e System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbour unit e Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbour unit e System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbour unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other 2 Repeater 3 Bridge 4 WLAN Access Point 5 Router 6 Telephone 7 DOCSIS cable device 112 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 8 Station only 9 Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by System Description System Description is the port description advertised by the neighbour unit Management Address Management Address is the neighbour unit s address that i
289. ure AAA setting of TACACS or RADIUS server Web Interface To configure a Common Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Set Timeout Default is 15 seconds 2 Set Dead Time Default is 300 seconds To configure a TACACS Authorization and Accounting Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Authorization 2 Select Enabled in the Failback to Local Authorization 3 Select Enabled in the Account To configure a RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration of AAA in the web interface Check Enabled 2 Specify IP address or Hostname for Radius Server 3 Specify Authentication Port for Radius Server Default is 1812 4 Specify the Secret with Radius Server To configure a RADIUS Accounting Server Configuration of AAA in the web interface 1 Check Enabled 2 Specify IP address or Hostname for Radius Server 3 Specify Accounting Port for Radius Server Default is 1813 4 Specify the Secret with Radius Server To configure a TACACS Authentication Server Configuration of AAA in the web interface Check Enabled 2 Specify IP address or Hostname for TACACS Server 3 Specify Authentication Port for TACACS Server Default is 49 4 Specify the Secret with TACACS Server k Figure 4 5 3 1 The Common Server Configuration Authentication Server Configuration Common Server Configuration Timeout 15 seconds Dead Time 300 seconds Figure
290. ved values 96 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 6 2 VLAN Configuration When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast traffic If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address it forwards that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address It drops that traffic for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To configure the MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration 2 Specify the VLAN ID with entries per page 3 Click Refresh to refresh an entry of the MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 3 7 2 The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page VLAN ID Snooping Enabled MLD Querier Compatibility RV Ql sec QRI 0 1sec LLQI 0 1sec URI sec 1 O z x Parameter description VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN MLD Snooping Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected 0 MLD Querier A router sends MLD Query messages onto a particular li
291. vice connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced 274 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet IPMC IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host L LACP LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port LLC The IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC protocol provides a
292. ving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not affect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well o Point to Point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than to a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media Oo Buttons Save Click to save changes 76 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 4 5 MSTI Ports The section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well An MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured on and applicable to the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options lt contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Port Configuration parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Ports 2 Scroll to select the MST1 or other MSTI Port 3 Click Get to set the detail parameters of the MSTI Ports 4 Scroll to set all parameters of the MSTI P
293. will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors CDP Aware Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbors table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbors table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped to the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped to the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the 110 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 LLDP neighbors table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped to the LLDP Port ID field CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped to the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP support system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of t
294. will show following Policy Port Configuration 7 Select Policy ID for each port 8 Click Save Figure 3 8 3 The LLDP MED Configuration 114 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 Policies Delete Policy ID Application Type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority DSCP 0 Voice v Tagged 1011 0 0 1 Voice Tagged 1 0 110 Parameter description Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VolP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily soeed up the transmission of the LLDPDU
295. y as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behaviour for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 Adding a new policy Click to add a new policy Specify the Application type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy Click Save Port Policies Configuration Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration Port The port number to which the configuration applies Policy Id The set of policies that shall apply to a given port The set of policies is selected by check marking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 119 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 8 4 LLDP MED Neighbours This page provides a status overview of all LLDP MED neighbours The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected This function applies to VoIP devices which support LLDP MED The columns hold the following information Web Interface To show LLDP MED neighbor 1 Click LLDP MED Neighbor 2 Click Refresh for manual update web scre
296. y device can access the port via MAC address Port Security Action To scroll to select when the device wasn t allow to access then switch action as trap shutdown or trap amp shutdown Port Security limit To set the Port security limit the default is 1 Port Security limit To set the Port security limit It means you can set how many device MAC address will allow to access the port the default is 1 Spanning Tree Admin Edge To scroll to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Admin Edge function on the Easy Port Spanning Tree BPDU Guard To scroll to enable or disable the Spanning Tree BPDU Guard function on the Easy Port Buttons Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 201 Publication date Oct 2012 Revision A3 3 21 Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the target port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner Mirror Configuration is to monitor the traffic of the network For example we assume that Port A and Port B are Monitoring Port and Monitored Port respectively thus the traffic received by Port B will be copied to Port A for monitoring Web Interface To configure the Mirror in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Mirroring 2 Scroll to select Port to mirror on whic

065-7861POE Series User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents